Jump to content

Leaderboard


Popular Content

Showing content with the highest reputation since 09/08/1970 in Knowledge Base Articles

  1. 35 points
    In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano 日本語 Português Pусский Türkçe As of March 14, 2018, pricing for each mainland tier allotment has been reduced by 10%. Additionally, Premium subscribers now receive 1024m² of bonus land allotment, doubled from the previous 512m². Pricing and allotment comparison Previous tier structure New tier structure Total land allowance (m²) Pricing (USD) Total land allowance (m²) Pricing (USD) 512 Free with Premium account 1,024 Free with Premium account 1,024 $5.00 1,536 $4.00 1,536 $8.00 2,048 $7.00 2,560 $15.00 3,072 $13.00 4,608 $25.00 5,120 $22.00 8,704 $40.00 9,216 $35.00 16,896 $75.00 17,408 $67.00 33,280 $125.00 33,792 $112.00 Not available Not available 49,152 $150.00 66,048 $195.00 66,560 $175.00 Above the maximum shown on this table, tier allotment increases in quarter-Region increments at $44.00 each.
  2. 10 points
    What is abandoned land? How to abandon land How to tell if land is abandoned What happens to abandoned land I abandoned my land by mistake! How to request purchase of abandoned land Review of land that looks abandoned In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano 日本語 Português What is abandoned land? Abandoned land is a mainland parcel that has been returned to Linden Lab by the previous owner. How to abandon land Open the World menu and select About Land. The About Land window opens. In the General tab of the About Land window, click Abandon Land. Review the confirmation and click Ok. How to tell if land is abandoned Abandoned land is owned by Governor Linden and contains the term "Abandoned Land" in the parcel name. The parcel description often includes the name of the previous owner. Land that is owned by another Resident is not abandoned, even if it appears to be unused. What happens to abandoned land When a mainland parcel is abandoned, the ownership of the parcel changes to Governor Linden. There is no Linden dollar (L$) grant related to abandoned land. Once abandoned, the parcel settings are amended to reflect the abandoned status and auto-return settings are enabled after one week. Note: This program applies only to Linden-owned Mainland areas and does not include Private Regions. I abandoned my land by mistake! You should never expect to be able to reclaim abandoned land. Please use care to make sure that any abandonment action is intentional. However, if you do make a mistake, please submit a support case as soon as possible. Include the parcel location and explain that you would like to reclaim a parcel you abandoned by mistake. We can attempt to make a one-time courtesy effort to recover the land for you. How to request purchase of abandoned land To request the sale of abandoned land, submit a support case of the type Land & Region, and choose Abandoned Land from the second dropdown. Provide the details of your request. In many cases, we can assist by making a larger or smaller sized parcel available rather than the actual parcel that has been requested. If you require a different size parcel than what is currently available, please request the desired size (in square meters) and provide a SLurl to the parcel's location. We will attempt to assist with a direct sale to the Resident who has made the request, so please submit a ticket as soon as you are aware of the abandoned location. We attempt to give priority to those who already have land in the region, so please let us know if the request is for neighboring or additional land within the same region. We will try to assist with a direct sale of the abandoned land at a the price of L$1 per square meter. In some cases, abandoned land may not be eligible for a direct sale. In these cases we will attempt to make the land available for sale via the auction system. Here are some of the reasons that requested land may need to be offered as an auction: The location has a limited amount of abandoned land in the region. The location is neighboring protected land or waterfront. The location is in a themed area such as Bay City, Horizons, or Nautilus. The location offers bonus object use. The location is Adult rated. The location is newly abandoned and not known to be available. These are only guidelines; each request is considered on a case-by-case basis and we may not be able to assist by making an abandoned parcel available as a direct sale or auction. Review of land that looks abandoned If you find a parcel that appears to be owned by a defunct account or group, there is a possibility that we can make the parcel available for sale. However, please note that land owned by a valid account or group is not abandoned, even if it appears to be unused. Please bear in mind that many Residents have annual accounts, and it may take many months for the account status to expire if they have chosen to leave or use a different account. Land cannot be reclaimed simply due to inactivity. If you have a premium account, you can trigger an auction for abandoned land by opening a support case with the following information: The parcel's SLurl. The concern that prompted you to investigate the parcel's status.
  3. 8 points
    Introduction Themes Traditional homes Houseboats Campers Victorian Log Homes First-generation themes Features Getting your Linden Home Prerequisites Checking if you have enough land tier available Signing up New premium accounts Existing basic accounts Existing premium accounts Troubleshooting Finding your Linden Home Abandoning or changing your Linden Home Enjoying your Linden Home What you can do Covenant and restrictions Etiquette House controllers House control panels Content creation packs Textures Privacy Getting help Requesting terraforming of adjoining land Bellisseria Fairgrounds In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano 日本語 Português Pусский Türkçe Introduction Linden Homes are ready-to-move-in homes in themed communities that are available only to premium account members. Premium account holders can get a free Linden Home, in addition to the other benefits of premium membership. For more information, see Premium membership. Themes ✏️ Note: For detailed photos of our Linden Home offerings and more information about the new Linden Home continent of Bellisseria, visit our New Linden Homes 2019 page on the Official Second Life wiki. Linden homes come in themed communities, each with choices of individual homes: Traditional homes Traditional suburban homes are arranged along tree-lined streets on 1024 sq m parcels. The homes are one and two-story buildings with shingle roofs, and in most models, a porch or patio area. A typical home has a two or more large rooms on the main floor and may have one or two upstairs. As described in a later section of this guide, you may use the House Controller on your parcel to choose among the styles pictured here, and you may use the house controller to change colors and details both inside and on the outside of the house. A traditional home is set back from the sidewalk and may have a hedge, a wall, or a low fence to set it apart from its neighbors. You may add to the planting or other landscaping elements on the parcel . Traditional homes are all within a convenient distance from communal park areas where you can join your friends for picnics, sports, or family activities. Some communal areas offer a dining or dance area, or a pool where you can relax. Houseboats With a houseboat home, you can enjoy life in coves and inlets around the perimeter of the continent or the large nearby island, or along rivers or around the large bay in the center of the continent. You cannot travel on a houseboat, but each houseboat parcel has room for you to moor your own sailboat or other watercraft. All water areas around the New Linden Homes continent are navigable and public. The houseboat models have large rooms with a high ceiling and skylights, plus a deck area outside for you to relax or entertain on. Most houseboats are on 16 m x 64 m water parcels. Some are on square 32 m x 32 m parcels. Therefore, all have an area of 1024 sq m. All are accessible by open water. You may also walk easily from one place to another, along wooden docks that divide the parcels, or along sandbars and spits from the mainland. Houseboats are all within convenient reach of community areas and cultural venues (lighthouses, beaches, and community buildings where you may gather with friends). Campers Experience the country life while you sit back and relax in your own Linden Homes camping trailer. Spacious trailers -- 8 different models in all -- are all set on 512 sqm (16m X 32m) parcels in beautiful wooded regions. Depending on the model you choose, your home can be a sleek, aerodynamically designed trailer, or one that looks more like a Roma caravan, or one of several other designs. Victorian Homes Be prepared for late 19th century living when you choose a spacious Victorian-themed home. All homes in this theme are on 32 x 32m parcels and sited in the sort of small community that would have been new 150 years ago -- complete with cobblestone streets and wrought iron street lamps. By using your House Controller, you may select any of four models, featuring signature Victorian features like turrets, expansive porches, and elegant bay windows. Log Homes The log homes are your opportunity to enjoy comfortable country living. Nestled in forested hills and valleys, these upscale log homes bring you close to nature and still let you enjoy the clean, modern lines of a house that you can live in year-round. Four styles each offer high ceilings and both upstairs and downstairs rooms. Other amenities include balconies, large windows, and a porch. First-generation themes First-generation Linden Homes have limited space and land capacity. Homes in these themes are still available for purchase, but provide less land capacity and use older-style control panels: Tahoe - Rustic cabin retreats with winding roads among hills and pine forests. Elderglen - Fantasy dwellings with winding roads around hills and giant trees. Sahreta Osumai - Traditional Japanese homes nestled in picturesque areas with mossy rocks and colorful trees. Meadowbrook - California modern suburban homes with decks perfect for barbeques! First-generation Linden Homes have a land capacity of 175 on a 512 m2 parcel. Features Linden Homes contain one or more of the following features, depending on the type of home: Touch entry - Left-click the front door to enter and exit your home. Touch lighting - Click the lights to toggle them on and off. Working fireplace - Click the fireplace to toggle a fire on and off. You'll also get a control panel that enables you to manage your home accessories and to change the textures used in your home. For more information, see Using the control panel. Getting your Linden Home You can get a Linden Home when you sign up for a premium account, upgrade your basic account to premium, or if you already have a premium account and have not claimed your Linden Home yet. Prerequisites If you have a premium account and you have 512m2 available tier then you qualify for a Linden Home. For example, if you have a new premium account — you've just joined Second Life as a premium account or upgraded from a basic account — and haven't changed your land usage, then you have exactly 1024m2 of available tier. Note: You don't have to use your premium account 1024m2 land tier for a Linden Home. You can use it instead towards other mainland purchases or you can contribute it to group tier allocations. Also, if you abandon your Linden Home, you can use your 1024m2 tier to buy other mainland parcels. Checking if you have enough land tier available If you don't have any land already in Second Life, then you will always have enough land tier, because each premium account comes with 1024m2 of land tier. There are two ways to check if you have enough available tier: Inworld: From the Viewer menus, choose World > My land holdings.... Your available land tier is listed in Available for land purchases. Website: If you already own land, then you can also check if you have enough land tier on the Second Life website: Go to Your Account. On the left side of the page, click Account Summary. Find the section called Land Holdings Available square meters for purchase at your current tier is listed under Available for purchase. Signing up The Linden Home registration process offers options for theme, home type, and home name. Once you submit your registration, your selected home is immediately generated on the next available parcel within your selected theme. You cannot request a specific region or parcel location. New premium accounts Go to join.secondlife.com. Complete your registration. Upgrade to premium as prompted. Go to Linden Home registration and log in with your Second Life account and password. Existing basic accounts Go to Premium Membership registration and log in with your Second Life account. Follow the account upgrade process. Once your account is upgraded to Premium Membership, the page will redirect to Linden Home registration. Existing premium accounts Go to Linden Home registration and log in with your Second Life account and password. View the four themed communities and home options within each theme. Click on your preferred home image. Name your home. Click Next. Read the Terms and Conditions and check the box agreeing to them. Click Accept. Review your Linden Home information on the confirmation page. Click Go to your Home or use the SLurl provided. Note: Confirmation is sent to the email address you provided to register your Second Life account. Troubleshooting If you didn't receive your email confirmation, be sure to check your email application's spam folder. It's also possible there has been an error in the email process, and your Linden Home is ready and waiting for you. If your Linden Home is ready, a landmark is sent to you inworld. If there appears to be such a problem, head to the Support Portal and submit a ticket. Identify whether the email did not go through and your home is actually available, or whether there was a problem with the registration process overall. Finding your Linden Home Your welcome email will provide the location of your Linden Home. If you lost or did not receive your welcome email, then there are two ways to locate your Linden Home: On the Second Life website: Log in using your Second Life username and password. Go to your Account Dashboard. On the left, click Land Manager. Click My Mainland. Look for the name of the Linden Home that you chose when you registered. Click the link in theLocation column to teleport there. Inworld: Login to Second Life with the Second Life Viewer Choose World > My land holdings... Select the parcel that matches your chosen Linden Home name. Click Teleport. You will be teleported to your Linden Home. Abandoning or changing your Linden Home To change your choice of Linden Home type, you must abandon your current Linden Home and then register for a new one. To abandon your Linden Home: Choose World > About Land and click the General tab. Click Abandon Land. After you confirm your choice, the land is removed from your account. Now if you wish, you can register for another Linden Home. Warning: Please use this reasonably: if you abandon and choose a new Linden Home five times in 24 hours, you are temporarily blocked from choosing another. You will need to wait 24 hours before registering again. Enjoying your Linden Home What you can do You can: Decorate your home with furniture or other items from Second Life Marketplace. Your partner or friends can help you decorate as well. Linden Home parcels work just like any other parcel of land in that regard; who can rez objects on your land depends on the About Land settings. See Managing land for more information. Customize textures used in your Linden Home via the control panel. See Using the control panel. Covenant and restrictions The covenant describes how you can use Linden Home land. To view the covenant, choose World > Region / Estate, then click the Covenant tab or right-click on the ground and choose About Land then click on the COVENANT tab. You are not allowed to: Terraform Linden Home land, sell it, deed it to a group, join it with another parcel, or divide the land. Modify the structure. For example, you can not move or eliminate individual components of your Linden Home such as the fireplace or a window. Move or rotate the structure. Your Linden Home must remain as it came on its 512m2 parcel. If you want both a Linden Home and more land for your premium account, you can use your remaining tier and/or upgrade on the Land Use Fees page. Tip: Linden Home land can't be group-owned. But if your personal Resident account is eligible for Linden Home land, you can set the land to a group to collaborate with other group members. Also, you agree that your Linden Home: Is for residential use only. Business use of any kind is prohibited, including parcel rental, rental boxes, classified ads or other forms of advertising, and event listings. Will be kept presentable and in-theme. Does not include traffic tracking. Land cannot contain temporary object rezzers or individual prims beyond the maximum size allowed by the Second Life Viewer build tools. Skyboxes are allowed on the Bellisseria continent above 2000 meters. Skyboxes are not allowed for first-generation Linden Homes. Etiquette Living in a community includes courtesy towards your neighbors. Here are some guidelines for etiquette in Linden Home regions: Use local chat say, rather than shout. Adhere to the maturity rating for the Linden Home region you are in. Respect your neighbors' privacy. Review general Second Life etiquette suggestions and incorporate them into your Linden Home experience. House controllers Each Linden Homes parcel is equipped with a House Controller like the one shown here. It is just outside the parcel boundary, often near a street or sidewalk or on the dock next to a houseboat parcel. Yours may look like a mailbox or some other marker appropriate to the neighborhood. A House Controller is your tool for selecting the specific model of home you want to erect on the parcel. To use it, simply left-click on it. The House Controller will only respond if you are the current owner of the parcel. It will not respond to guests, friends, or strangers. When you rez a new home, we advise you to wait for 30 seconds before using any of the house controls. This will allow time for the home to download important information about its decor and access permissions. Choose a home from one of the available models by clicking one of the numbered buttons. Your new home will appear near the center of the parcel, replacing whichever home was there before. You cannot rotate the home (except for Camping Trailers) or move it to another spot on the parcel. Linden Homes are always rezzed with the front door facing the House Controller. You may replace the model on your parcel at any time. Homes within a theme all fit in the same parcel area, so they will not interfere with vegetation, fencing, or other objects that Linden Lab has placed on land next to your parcel. However, because each model has a different floor plan, you will usually need to move furniture or other items that you have placed in a previous home so that it is arranged well in your new home. If you select the notecard option, you will receive an instructional notecard. It will explain the features of your house in greater detail than they are covered in this guide. If you select the Content Creation Pack option, you will receive a folder of items that you may use to landscape your parcel and decorate your home. House control panels As you enter a Linden Home, you will find a Control Panel just inside the front door. The control panel is your tool for customizing the appearance of your home and for controlling access. The layout of menu buttons for a Control Panel varies slightly from one theme to another, but all Linden Homes have the same basic set of functions described here. Click on the Control Panel to see the main menu of your options: When you make most changes with the Control Panel, you receive confirmation in chat. A notice appears within a few seconds to tell you that the new information has been recorded in the system. The Door button offers you a choice between allowing your doors to Stay Open when you click on them, or to AutoClose within ten seconds after they are opened. The Windows button on the main menu toggles the window covering (blinds) up or down. Using this button in the Control Panel toggles all windows in the house at once, so that they are all either up or down at the same time. If you (or a person you have granted access to) want to raise or lower a single window covering, you can do that by simply left-clicking on the window covering (Note: Some house models also offer the option to open and close individual windows. Where that option is available, it is not managed in the Control Panel. To open a window, you just left-click on it). The Access button, which is only visible to you as the parcel owner, will let you give additional people permission to use the Control Panel menus. Using its Add Name menu option, you create a whitelist and add anyone you choose. The person does not need to belong to a special group. You may remove the person’s access permission at any time by clicking this same Access button and using the Remove Name option. If you have created a whitelist, you may check to see who is on it by using the View List option. The Access menus allow you to control who has permission to use some features in your home. There are three access levels: ONLY ME is the highest level. If you click that menu button, nobody else may use the Control Panel, operate the window blinds, or open doors. LIST is the middle level. If you have created a whitelist, selecting LIST gives people on the list permission to operate window and door functions, and most functions in the Control Panel (but not the Access functions). ANYONE is the lowest level. If you click that button, anybody may open doors or operate the blinds. Only you and people on the whitelist may use the Control Panel. Please note that the Access menu does not control permission to rez objects in your home, or change its music stream. Manage those permissions by creating a group for your home, as discussed later in this guide. The Redecorate button offers options which are different in each home theme, although some features are found in all themes. The Outside button offers different color schemes for painting the siding on the home. The Wall button lets you change the color of the walls inside your home. The Floor button lets you choose among options for flooring inside the home, so you may opt for carpeting or different types of wood flooring. Submenu buttons on some themed homes include options for changing the color of the Roof, Trim, Deck, or other parts of the home that are special for that theme. Most menus in your Control Panel also contain two other buttons. The Done button closes the Control Panel menus and saves your most recent changes in the system’s memory. The Back button opens the previous dialog menu. Custom interior wall colors Starting with the Victorian Homes, introduced in late 2019, the Control Panel includes a new option for decor, the ability to create up to nine custom colors to apply to interior walls in your home. Clicking on the My Colors button in either the Main menu or the Redecorate > Walls menu opens a submenu that lets you decide whether to create a New Color or apply one that you have created before: You may then use either a Color Picker (graphic interface) or may type in RGB values for a color that you may have designed elsewhere. The Color Picker is similar to the interface that you will find in your SL viewer’s Edit > Texture > Color panel: If you choose the Type <RGB> option instead, it opens a text box where you may enter numerical values for the Red, Green, and Blue components of a color Once you have created a color using either method, you may apply it to the walls in any room in the house. You may also apply any of nine preset colors if you wish. Content creation packs As a homeowner, you may want to personalize your parcel by adding vegetation, pathways, rocks, or other decorative items. Please remember to stay within the theme of your neighborhood. For more specific details, refer to the covenant in World > About Land when you are standing in your parcel. As an aid, your Linden Home comes with a free Content Creation Pack. In it, you will find items that you may use to spruce up your home/parcel -- items such as decor items, textures, wall/fence kits and lighting may be included. Unlike the house itself, which does not add to the Land Impact on your parcel, these extra objects and anything else that you rez will add land impact, so be careful to stay within your limit. Refer to World > About Land > Objects to verify your available land impact. You may receive the Content Creation Pack by clicking on the appropriate menu option in your House Controller. Textures Texture packs with the building textures for each first-generation Linden Home theme are available at the Linden Home infohubs. Resale of textures is prohibited. Texture pack locations: Meadowbrook Infohub Tahoe Infohub Elderglen Infohub Shareta Osumai Infohub Privacy Total privacy in an open community like Linden Homes is not possible, but there are ways that you can manage access to your home and its features. As noted above, for example, you can use your home’s Control Panel to control who may enter your home and use its redecorate functions. You may also use the Options tab in World > About Land to determine who is allowed to rez objects on your parcel and whether people outside the parcel can see and hear what you are doing. You may not use selections in the Access tab of About Land to set ban lines around your parcel, but you may use the Linden Homes Security System (found in the Content Creation Pack) to eject unwanted visitors from your parcel. You may not use other security systems that have a shorter warning time or a greater detection range than the Linden Homes Security System. The security system is designed to be wall-mounted. When activated, it scans your parcel as much as 400m above and below the control unit, provides a warning to unauthorized visitors, and then ejects them from the parcel. It does not detect people in neighboring parcels. You may adjust the system’s range and the amount of warning time (minimum 15 seconds), and may tell the system to ignore members of your group or specific people that you have added to its whitelist. The system will not function if it is placed at an altitude between 100m and 2000m above sea level, but can be used in your Linden Home or in a skybox above 2000m. Instructions for setting up the system and operating it are provided on a notecard with the unit, and in shortened form, by clicking on the system’s help (?) button. Getting help As a premium account holder, you're eligible for live chat and ticket support from the Support Portal. If you need support for your Linden Home: Go to the Support Portal and choose Submit a Support Case. Select Land and Region from the first dropdown menu. Select Linden Home Issues from the second dropdown menu. Fill out the required fields; make sure to include as much relevant information as possible when describing your issue. Click Submit to submit your ticket. Requesting terraforming of adjoining land If there is an issue with the terraforming of your parcel or nearby land that you suspect is an error: Go to the Support Portal. Click Contact Support. Click Submit a Support Case form. From the dropdown menus, choose: Land and Region Linden Home Issues - Terrain or Content Fill in the rest of the required fields. Click Submit to submit your ticket. Bellisseria Fairgrounds The Bellisseria Fairgrounds is open to all Premium Residents of Second Life to use for their events. Private events that require the Fairgrounds to be restricted to a certain list or group of people are not a good use for the space; however, if you are happy to welcome anyone to your events then the Bellisseria Fairgrounds is a great place to choose to plan your next party, get together, shindig or whatever! Any Premium member can reserve the Bellisseria Fairgrounds for their event, though preference will be given to members of Bellisseria Resident groups. While any public event is welcome at the Fairgrounds, we encourage the planning of events that contribute to and support the Bellisseria community spirit. Use this form to reserve the Bellisseria Fairground to host an event: http://bit.ly/BellisseriaFairgroundsCalendar
  4. 8 points
    Visiting a Place Page Managing your Place Pages Setting a landing point Hiding a Place Page Using a 360 snapshot as a Hero Image Determining who last edited a Place Page Bulk enabling and disabling Place Pages Want to tell the world about your Second Life land, parcel or region? Now you can with Place Pages, which are Linden-hosted web pages that make it easier than ever to promote and discover your presence in Second Life. Visiting a Place Page To visit a place page, simply click a Place Page URL in the page you’re viewing or paste it into your web browser's address bar. You may also search for a Place Page by entering your search terms into the search bar on the Place Pages front page. While viewing a Place Page, you may learn more about the location, view images and videos, or ultimately visit the location in Second Life by clicking the Visit this location button located on the large image at the top of the page. Note: Upon visiting a place from a Place Page, you appear at either the parcel's landing point or the region's telehub, depending upon whether the Place Page depicts a parcel or a region. If no telehub is set for the region, you appear at the center of the region. Region owners and Estate Managers always appear at the center of their own regions. Place Page features Visit This Location - Click this button to visit the location depicted in the Place Page. Share It - Click to share this place page on Facebook or Twitter. Region Information - Lists information about the Region if this is a Region Place Page, including Name, Owner, Type, Size, and Maturity. Parcel Information - Lists information about the Parcel if this is a Parcel Place Page, including Name, Owner, Type, Size, Maturity, Category, and Region. Report Abuse - Click to file an abuse report against the Place Page. This may be appropriate if the Place Page: is not marked as Mature or Adult content when appropriate, is spam, or infringes your intellectual property rights. View Covenant (optional) - View the Region's covenant in a pop-up frame. This link is available on both Region and Parcel place pages. Upcoming Events (optional) - View and filter a calendar of upcoming events on this land. Click event names to get more details about each event. Items for Sale (optional) - View items currently for sale on the parcel. Click Go next to an item to teleport directly to the item inworld. FOR SALE (optional) - Appears if the land is currently for sale, and lists the sale price. Managing your Place Pages By default, every parcel and region in the Second Life world has a Place Page that is automatically derived from information in the parcel's existing profile. You may edit and embellish a Place Page for any parcel or region you own, or for group-owned parcels for which you have the Toggle 'Show Place in Search' and set category group ability. However, nobody can visit a Place Page unless the parcel's Show Place in Search checkbox is checked in the About Land window. Please note that this is toggled “off” by default, so you’ll need to enable it. To view and edit your place pages: Visit the place pages dashboard at: https://places.secondlife.com and log in using your Second Life credentials. In the upper right of the dashboard, move the mouse over your name and select My Places from the dropdown to view a full list of parcels and regions you own. Choose a region or parcel and click the Edit link next to that land's listing to begin editing the Place Page for that land. Under Details on the Place Page Edit page, fill out the following: Disable this place page - Disables the Place Page so nobody can view it. Show Covenant - Select this box to allow visitors to view the Region's Covenant on your Place Page. Show Items for Sale - Select this box to show items for sale on the parcel, and the inworld location of those items. Sale items may take up to 24 hours to appear on your Place Page. Each sale item must be set to Show in search on the General tab of the object editor window. Items set to Show in search that are not for sale still appear in the list, but are moved to the end of the list and have a cost listed as "Not Available". Show Calendar - Displays an event calendar and a list of upcoming events for the parcel. Visitors can filter events by specific date and click the event's name to learn more about the event. If there are no upcoming events, the calendar and event list are not shown. Title - The title for the Place Page. Typically, this is the name of your land. Tagline - A short, descriptive subtitle, displayed prominently on the "hero" banner at the top of the page. Description - A longer description or profile for the location, displayed below the images on the Place Page. Under the Optional section, you may provide a YouTube link in order to display a video on your Place Page. The Optional section also provides options for you to customize the color of your Place Page's background and font. Under the Hero Image section, choose an image to be the background of the banner at the top of your Place Page. Hero images must be 1980x700 resolution, or else they may be subject to distortion. Under Additional Images, you may choose up to three additional images to display on your Place Page. The images are shown as a slideshow and periodically cycle if not clicked by a user. Additional images must be of 852x486 resolution or they may be subject to distortion. The Region Information section provides statistical information about the land, and cannot be edited in the Place Page Editor. Setting a landing point A landing point is the spot where visitors appear when they teleport to a parcel of land, including teleports that are initiated by clicking the Visit this location button on a place page. Landing points can enhance your visitors' experience by directing them to an appropriate starting location on your land. Because landing points are a property of parcels and are not specific to Place Pages, they can only be set from within the Second Life Viewer and cannot be changed in Place Pages settings. For instructions on how to set the landing point on land that you own, see Managing your parcel - Setting a landing point. Note: When visiting a region's Place Page, visitors appear at the region's telehub. If no telehub is set, they appear at the center of the region. Region owners and Estate Managers always appear at the center of the region, regardless of whether a telehub is set. Hiding a Place Page Place Pages for land parcels are not visible to other Residents unless the land's Show Place in Search checkbox is checked in the About Land window. This box is unchecked by default. You may access the About Land window by visiting the parcel, then choosing World > About land from the top menu bar. If you wish to hide an entire region's Place Page (and Place Pages for all parcels on the region), you may check the Block Land Show in Search checkbox in the Region tab of the Region/Estate window. You may access the Region/Estate window by visiting the region and choosing World > Region/Estate from the top menu bar. Using a 360 snapshot as a Hero Image Note: The 360 snapshot feature is still in a very experimental Project Viewer stage, and is subject to drastic change or removal at any time as development continues. If you have captured a 360 snapshot using the 360 Snapshot Project Viewer, you may upload a captured 360 snapshot in place of your Hero Image: Capture a 360 snapshot to your computer as described in Taking inworld snapshots. Go to https://places.secondlife.com/spherical_zips in your web browser. You must be logged into the Second Life website in order to complete this step. Click the New button, then click Choose File and select the captured 360 snapshot (ending in ".zip") from your computer. Choose one of your places from the Place dropdown. Press the Update button to upload your 360 snapshot to the selected Place Page. An uploaded 360 snapshot replaces the Hero Image for the selected Place Page, allowing visitors to pan around the image for a full 360 degree view of the place where the image was captured. Determining who last edited the Place Page At the very bottom of the Place Page editor is a Last Updated by field that indicates when the page was last edited, and by whom. This can be of use to groups in which multiple officers may have the ability to edit Place Pages for the group's land. Bulk enable and disable Place Pages You can use the Bulk Enable/Disable tool to enable or disable more than one Place Page at a time. To use the Bulk Enable/Disable tool: Visit https://places.secondlife.com/ Click My Places to open a list of your Place Pages. Scroll to the bottom of the page and click the link for Bulk Enable/Disable. On the Bulk Enable/Disable page, you can use the radio buttons in the Edit Status column to Enable or Disable each eligible Place Page. You may use the Enable All or Disable All button to automatically mark all pages accordingly. These changes are not finalized until you click the Update button at the bottom of the page. Click Update to enable and/or disable the marked Place Pages. You are then returned to My Places. Note: To help sort a large number of place paces, you can click the column headings in the Bulk Enable/Disable tool to sort by: Project Name & Description Current Status Edit Status Show in Search You may also use the Search field to look for a specific parcel or set of parcels.
  5. 7 points
    What is Tilia? Processing credit with Tilia Identity verification questions Why am I required to provide personal information to Tilia and what will you do with it? What types of IDs are acceptable? I have already submitted my photo ID. Why do I have to do it again? My bank, credit card company, or PayPal has already verified my identity. Why do I need to verify again with Tilia? I do not have a Social Security Number. How do I proceed? What if I do not want to submit Social Security information? Why wasn't this information asked for during registration? When will I be asked for an ID? Can I voluntarily submit my ID for verification before making a process credit request? How long does this process take? What happens to my US dollar balance if I don't comply? What is an acceptable proof of address? If I change my legal name, what kind of documents do I need to provide? How do I update my email on file so I can see the information request? What kinds of transactions do not normally require ID verification? Tilia usage questions Can I access my Tilia account separately from my Second Life account? Can Tilia credit U.S. dollars directly to my bank account? Do I need to use Tilia to buy Linden dollars? How can I avoid the inactivity fee? Why can't I process credit? What happens if I don't accept Tilia's Terms of Service? Technical and legal questions Is my information stored securely? Is Tilia compliant with GDPR? Does Tilia share my personal information with the government? Will my data be used for data mining purposes? Will my U.S. Dollar balance escheat to the state? What happens if a Second Life Resident dies with a U.S. Dollar balance still on their Tilia account? In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano 日本語 Português Русский Türkçe What is Tilia? Tilia is a subsidiary of Linden Lab that offers certain financial services to the Second Life community and helps Second Life comply with U.S. laws and regulations. As of August 1, 2019, Tilia assumes management of your account's U.S. dollar balance in the form of your Tilia account. Tilia also handles process credit requests and payments made from your Tilia account. A Tilia account associated with your Second Life account is created automatically, and you do not need a separate username or password to access your Tilia account. Processing credit with Tilia In order to stay in compliance with regulatory requirements, if you wish to credit a portion of your U.S. Dollar balance to your PayPal or Skrill account (known as processing a credit) then you must provide certain personal information to verify your identity, including your: Name Address Date of birth Social security number (or government-issued identification if you are not a U.S. Citizen). You may also be required to provide additional information to complete the transaction. Tilia securely stores this information so that you should only need to provide it once. Note: Customers under 18 years of age will not be able to process credit after August 1, 2019 until they reach the age of 18. Important: If your Tilia Account is inactive for a period of 12 months, you will be charged an inactivity fee. Your Tilia Account will be charged this fee each successive month until it is no longer inactive. More information about this fee can be found in Section 3.4 of Tilia’s Terms of Service. Identity verification questions Why am I required to provide personal information to Tilia and what will you do with it? As registered money services businesses, Linden Lab and Tilia are required to comply with applicable U.S. laws and regulations. As part of our ongoing risk management process, we must obtain, verify, and record information about our customers for whom we offer financial-related services. We take your privacy and security seriously, so your personal information will continue to remain protected and will only be used for purposes that are outlined in Linden Lab’s and Tilia’s Privacy Policies. What types of IDs are acceptable? Acceptable forms of photo ID include: Driver's license Passport Any other form of government-issued photo ID If you do not have any of these forms of identification, please contact our customer support team for additional guidance. I have already submitted my photo ID. Why do I have to do it again? The financial-related services that are offered by Linden Lab are now managed by Linden Lab's wholly-owned subsidiary, Tilia Inc. Tilia is required to comply with applicable U.S. laws and regulations. As part of our ongoing risk management process, we obtain, verify, and record information about our customers for whom we offer financial-related services. Your personal information will remain protected and will only be used for purposes that are outlined in our Privacy Policy, which can be accessed on our website. Most Residents will not need to resubmit information if it has been previously provided. However, there may be some instances where Tilia may need to collect and verify the documentation again. My bank, credit card company, or PayPal has already verified my identity. Why do I need to verify again with Tilia? As a money services business, Tilia is required to comply with the various state and federal laws regarding money transmission, which require us to collect and verify this information regardless of whether you have provided this information to other financial institutions, such as your credit card company or PayPal. I do not have a Social Security Number. How do I proceed? If you are not a U.S. Citizen, you can provide a passport and a utility bill to verify your identity. If you are a U.S. Citizen and do not have a Social Security number, please contact customer service. What if I do not want to submit Social Security information? We will not be able to process your transaction without your Social Security information; the law states that we must collect and verify this information. Why wasn't this information asked for during registration? The requirements for collecting information only apply to certain financial transactions, such as using funds in your stored value wallet to process credit to US dollars. There are no such regulatory requirements for registering to use Second Life. When will I be asked for an ID? You are asked for ID when you initiate a process-credit request and send US dollars to your payment method on file. Can I voluntarily submit my ID for verification before making a process credit request? Yes. You can voluntarily submit your ID for verification without making a process credit request. This will ensure that you do not experience a delay when attempting to process credit for the first time with Tilia. Please visit your Billing Information page on the Second Life website. You can access the submission form by clicking We may need some additional information in order to process credit from your Tilia account. Once your identity has been verified, the message changes to read, "We have all the information we require to process credit from your Tilia account. Thank you!" For more information about this process, please see this blog post: Voluntary Regulatory Information Submission. How long does this process take? Requests are usually processed within one to three days, but in some cases the process may take up to 30 days. What happens to my US dollar balance if I don't comply? Your stored U.S. dollar balance remains on your account. We will not accept any process-credit requests until we have received and reviewed the requested documents. You may continue to use your U.S. Dollar balance to pay for Second Life services and Linden dollars. What is an acceptable proof of address? Acceptable documents are listed below, and must be dated within the last 3 months: Current utility bill Bank, credit card, or financial statement Cell phone bill Rental agreement or lease Tax form Voter registration Insurance statement Photos of these documents must be clear and in-focus, cover the full document, and must clearly show the required information. If I change my legal name, what kind of documents do I need to provide? If you change your name, you must submit updated information. Acceptable documents include: Name change certificate Marriage certificate Certificate of Divorce Certificate of commitment How do I update my email on file to make sure I can receive communications from Tilia? If you would like to update your email account to a more current one, you may do so by clicking this link: https://accounts.secondlife.com/change_email/. We encourage you to verify your email address and make sure it remains current. What kinds of transactions do not normally require ID verification? ID verification applies to process credit requests, which are requests to credit some or all of your U.S. Dollar balance to a PayPal or Skrill account. Therefore, the following types of transactions do not normally require you to send your personal information: Buying Linden dollars with any payment method Using a credit card, PayPal, or Skrill to pay for Second Life services such as Premium membership or land use fees Spending Linden dollars Selling Linden dollars on the LindeX Tilia usage questions Can I access my Tilia account separately from my Second Life account? This is currently not possible. Your Tilia account is integrated with your Second Life account, and is accessed through the Second Life website with your Second Life login credentials. Services that are provided by Tilia will be clearly marked. Can Tilia credit U.S. dollars directly to my bank account? Tilia cannot process credit directly to bank accounts at this time, but can credit your U.S. Dollar balance to a PayPal or Skrill account. Do I need to use Tilia to buy Linden dollars? No. Tilia is not involved in the Linden dollar purchase process. You can continue to use your payment method on file to buy Linden dollars and do not need to provide any additional personal information. How can I avoid the inactivity fee? If your Tilia account is inactive for a period of 12 months, you are charged a small, monthly inactivity fee of no more than $3.00 to offset the engineering, support, accounting, and compliance costs of maintaining your account. This inactivity fee cannot reduce your U.S. Dollar balance below zero, and will never result in a new credit card charge. The inactivity fee does not affect your Linden dollar balance. To avoid this inactivity fee, you need only to log into your account on the Second Life website at least once every 12 months. Additionally, Residents with a Premium membership will not incur an inactivity fee for as long as their Premium membership is current. Why can't I process credit? If we have not yet been able to verify your personal information documents, we will not be able to accept any process-credit requests. What happens if I don't accept Tilia's Terms of Service? If you maintain a U.S. Dollar balance (such as through the sale of Linden dollars on the LindeX), it is important that you review and accept the Tilia Terms of Service. You will be prompted to do so when you log into Secondlife.com. If you have a U.S. Dollar balance on August 1, 2019 and do not accept the Terms of Service, you will have until October 31, 2019 to do so or you will no longer be able to use your U.S. Dollar balance. If you do not accept the Terms of Service, you will still be able to log into Second Life and use your payment method on file (such as a credit card) to pay for items and services, but you will no longer have the ability to request a process credit transaction, or make payments for Second Life services from your U.S. Dollar balance. Technical and legal questions Is my information stored securely? We understand your concerns. Your information is protected as outlined in our Privacy Policy. If you do not feel comfortable providing the information through the internet, please contact customer support for additional methods. For more information about how we protect your data, check out our blog post: Information about Privacy and Security in Tilia. Is Tilia compliant with GDPR? Tilia is fully compliant with the General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR). For more information, please see our Privacy Policy. If you have specific questions about your individual account and situation, please contact our customer support team. Does Tilia share my personal information with the government? Tilia will not provide your information to any government unless compelled to do so through a legal process, such as a subpoena or search warrant. Will my data be used for data mining purposes? Tilia is not associated with data mining in any way, and your data will not be used for this purpose or sold to third parties. Tilia is a subsidiary of Linden Lab, and exists to strengthen our processes and better protect your data while allowing Second Life’s commercial backbone to thrive. Will my U.S. Dollar balance escheat to the state? Yes. Tilia will comply with unclaimed property laws in every state. What happens if a Second Life Resident dies with a U.S. Dollar balance still on their Tilia account? To see our current policy, visit our wiki article on this topic: Linden Lab Official:Death and other worries outside Second Life.
  6. 6 points
    Overview Why buy land? Types of land How to buy land Buying mainland Buying Private Regions Additional tips Land tier Example Land use fees Exceptions Finding land to buy Land sales in Private Regions Land object capacity Overview More than one parcel in a region Vehicles and parcel limits Object bonus factor In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano 日本語 Português Pусский Türkçe Overview Why buy land? Owning land can be one of the most exciting and rewarding experiences in Second Life. Once you become a landowner, you truly become a part of the Second Life community, and can create and keep things inworld that will be there when you return. Your own land is a space you can customize however you want, and a canvas where your creations can come to life. Land in Second Life is a place to call home, where you can invite friends to hang out, hold events, and more. You can use many of the virtual items you purchase in Second Life—like clothes, accessories and cars—anywhere. But if you purchase a house, a garden, or an entire forest, you're going to need somewhere to put it: your own plot of land! Types of land How to buy land There are several ways to buy land: Buy a parcel on the mainland if you have a premium account. You get a free Linden Home with a premium account, which is a great way to get started with land ownership. See Linden Homes for more information. Buy an entire region (a private island). Instead of buying land, you can rent land: On a private estate - see Renting land from other Residents. On the mainland - see Renting a region for a special event. Buying mainland Linden Lab does not usually set land for direct sale on the mainland. However, there are two special cases in which you can obtain mainland parcels from Linden Lab: Auctions: Linden Lab regularly auctions mainland parcels via Second Life Land Auctions. Land owned on the mainland is subject to a land use fee (also known as a tier fee), which is a monthly charge in addition to premium membership. Abandoned land: In some special cases, Linden Lab sells abandoned mainland parcels to individual Residents. For more information, see Abandoned land. Remember that you can buy land from your fellow Residents, and if you want a whole region to yourself, you can buy a Private Region from the Land Store. Land owned by Governor Linden named "Protected Land" will not generally be terraformed or sold to Residents. Requirements To purchase mainland land in Second Life, you must have a premium account with current payment information on file, and your account must be in good standing. You may also be required to have a clean disciplinary record. As a premium account holder, you have 1024 square meters of tier, that is the ability to own 1024 square meters initially. For more information, see Land tier. A premium account also provides many other benefits. For more information, see Premium membership. Buying Private Regions A private region is a 256m x 256m piece of virtual land. Regions run on a single server and have their own set of controls beyond those provided to mainland parcel owners. For more information see: Buying Private Regions Private Regions Managing private regions Requirements By purchasing a Private Region, you are agreeing to pay the initial setup fee, plus monthly service fees for as long as you own the region. You are also agreeing to a restocking fee if you cancel your order. You will be charged the setup fee once the order is completed. Monthly fees begin 30 days from the date you complete your purchase. Procedure Once you find the land you want, buying it is easy: Right-click the parcel you want to purchase. Choose About Land. Click the Buy Land button. Review the purchase information. Click OK. Additional tips The following tips will help you purchase land wisely and confidently: Make sure you know exactly what you're purchasing! Press Ctrl-Alt-Shift-P on your keyboard to toggle parcel boundary lines. Right-click the parcel to bring up the About Land window, which shows you the land's Area in square meters. Look at the About Land window's General tab to see if objects are included in the sale. Check the Parcel land capacity entry in the About Land window's Objects tab. This indicates how much land impact the land can support before it stops allowing new objects to enter.. Important: If you don't own the land yet, the Region capacity entry is not a measure of the object usage you will receive! If the Advanced menu is active, try hiding objects by pressing Ctrl-Alt-Shift-1 on your keyboard to make sure there isn't a hidden "hole" in the property that you are unwittingly purchasing with the rest of the land. Make sure you're happy with the overall shape of the land. Most land in Second Life can only be raised 4m above or below its original position, and the previous owner may have already reached that limit. Land tier Land tier (often simply referred to as "tier) is a key concept of Second Life land ownership. "Tier" refers to the maximum amount of land you can own on the mainland, measured in square meters (m2). A premium account includes 1024m2 of tier, which can be used for a free Linden Home. Thus, the minimum tier that anyone can have is 1024m2. Note: Tier is not the land itself. It represents the maximum amount of land you can own before advancing to the next pricing tier. "Available tier" or "free tier" (free meaning "remaining" not "free of charge") refer to the remaining, potential land you can own, not counting land you already own. For example, "My tier is 1024m2. I own a 256m2 parcel, so I have 768m2 of free tier. If I buy a 384m2 parcel, that leaves me with 384m2 of tier that's available." Example For example, if you have "5,120m2 of available tier" — the premium account's included 1024m2 + 4,096m2 additional tier level — then you can own any combination of land parcels up to a total of 5,120m2. So owning a 1,024m2 parcel + a 2,048m2 parcel + another 2,048m2 parcel = 5,120m2 completely fills your tier. Land use fees If you need more land, you must upgrade. Use the Land Use Fees page to update your tier level. Upgrading to a higher tier increases your land use fees, but you get a bigger "box for blocks." Increasing your tier level is sometimes called "tiering up." You are notified when purchasing a land parcel if buying it will increase your tier. Tier is connected to but not the same as land use fees. You pay land use fees for tier. Tier is not a currency like Linden dollars. This is especially important for new landowners to understand, as some experienced Residents use the term inaccurately. It's accurate to say "I pay for tier," or "I pay tier fees," but not "I pay tier." Log into your Second Life account summary to manage your land use fees and land. Land use tiers and pricing are shown in the Land Use Fees page. Any tier beyond the first full region is assigned in half-region increments at a rate of US$97.50 per half region. A higher level appears in your land use fees when you upgrade beyond a full region on the mainland. If you sell the land and move back to a tier of one full region or below, the system automatically tiers you down. Note: Private Region (island) fees are charged independently, and do not affect your land tier level. Exceptions Note the following exceptions to the general rules stated above: You can own a private estate yet not have a mainland tier. Group-owned land gets a 10% bonus tier. See Group-owned land for more information. Some Resident-owned private estates have their own distinct tier systems which are not part of Linden Lab's land use fees. If you are renting from such an estate, contact the owner or another appropriate Resident directly for assistance. Finding land to buy The inworld Search tool enables you to browse and filter a comprehensive database of real estate listings. Simply follow these steps: In the Viewer, choose World > Search. Choose Land & Rentals from the dropdown menu at the top of the Second Life Search window. You can search by keyword or leave the Search field blank. Click Search. A list of classified real estate ads appears. In the lefthand column, select For Sale. If you wish, filter your results by customizing the Area and Price fields and by indicating what kind of land you wish to buy in the Type dropdown menu. The filters update the listings automatically. Click on a listing to view more details. When you find a property that interests you, click Teleport to go explore it! Tip: Looking for land on the mainland near you? Select World > World Map to open the map, then select the Land for Sale checkbox. Nearby land for sale is highlighted on the map. Second Life's Auctions also list land parcels up for sale to the highest bidder. Auction parcels can sell for Linden Dollars (L$) as well as US dollars (USD$). Land sales in Private Regions The mechanics of buying and selling land in a Private Region are very similar to the process on the mainland. However, there are a few key differences that buyers and sellers should take into account when making a land transaction in a Private Region. Similarities As the seller, the Private Region owner can split parcels of the region and set them for sale. The technical steps for buying the land are identical. Differences Parcels in Private Regions are governed by covenants. A covenant is a kind of contract, defined by the owner of the Private Region, to which you must agree before buying the land. It may outline details such as local theme, rental fees, architectural regulations, and rules of behavior. Land purchased in a Private Region does not count against your land use tier, however the owner may charge you a fee for continuing use of the land. The Private Region owner may evict you from your parcel in a Private Region at any time. Private Region owners have absolute power over their estates and are within their rights to reclaim land as they see fit. Make sure to read your region's covenant closely for terms of use before you buy your parcel. Private Region owners have use of the Region/Estate window which includes such region access options as: Access restricted to Residents based on payment status Region maturity can be set to General, Moderate, or Adult Tip: If a region owner changes the maturity setting for their region, it may affect who can access your parcel and view search listings made from it. Read the region covenant and communicate with the region owner (or estate manager where applicable) to avoid any disruptions to your parcel settings or access. Land object capacity The number of objects (prims) that can exist on a region is restricted due to technology limitations. The corresponding calculation for mesh objects are different. See Calculating land impact for more information. Overview Each region of 256m x 256m (65536 square meters) supports a land capacity of 15,000. Divided evenly, this means that each region has a capacity of approximately 0.229 per square meter. In practical terms, this means a 512 square meter parcel can support up to a capacity of 117, a 1024 square meter parcel can support up to 234, and so forth. More than one parcel in a region All parcels belonging to the same owner (or group) in the same region share their land capacity. You can view this represented as Region capacity in the About Land window. In this way, it is possible for the Parcel land impact number to be higher than the Parcel land capacity number. To view the About Land window, stand on a parcel and select World > About Land. For information about objects on the land, select the Objects tab in the About Land window. Vehicles and parcel limits Objects that are Selected / sat upon do not count against the Parcel land capacity. This allows vehicles to pass freely through parcels that might not otherwise be able to support them. Remember that a Region can only support 15,000 objects, regardless of parcel settings- if a Region is full, you cannot drive a vehicle into it. Object bonus factor In Private Regions, the owner may set a Object Bonus to increase the land capacity of each parcel. This setting multiplies the capacity each parcel can support by the Bonus Factor. It is important to note that this does not increase the maximum capacity supported by the Region, which means that not all parcels in the Region will be able to reach their listed maximum capacity.
  7. 6 points
    Saving an outfit Re-using an item in multiple outfits The Outfit Gallery Upload a photo Select a photo from your inventory Take a snapshot Wearing a saved outfit Replacing your outfit Adding to your outfit You may save and load many different looks for your avatar by using outfits. An outfit can include everything that makes up your avatar, including but not limited to your shape, skin, hair, clothing, and attachments. You may access your current outfits by choosing Me > Appearance... from the top menu bar in the Second Life Viewer. This opens the Appearance window, which allows you to browse, edit, and save outfits. Saving an outfit You can easily save your current outfit by using the Appearance window: Customize your avatar's appearance to your liking. For tips and helpful information about customizing your avatar, see Controlling your avatar's appearance. Once you've settled on a look, open the Appearance window by choosing Me > Appearance... from the top menu bar of the Second Life Viewer. Press the Save As button to save what you are currently wearing as a new outfit. Choose an appropriate name for your outfit and press the Ok button. If you want to save changes to an existing outfit, you can click that outfit in the Outfit Gallery or My Outfits tab of the Appearance window to select it, then press the triangle next to the Save As button to reveal and click the Save option. Re-using an item in multiple outfits The items in an outfit are actually links to the items in your inventory rather than distinct copies. In addition to reducing overall inventory clutter, this allows you to include no-copy clothing and attachments in many different outfits without having to purchase them more than once. The Outfit Gallery For each outfit, you can select a thumbnail image to help you remember what that outfit looks like. This can be incredibly helpful for Residents who like to maintain many different looks! You can access the Outfit Gallery by choosing Me > Appearance... from the top menu bar of the Second Life Viewer and clicking the Outfit Gallery tab. Every outfit in your inventory is shown in the Outfit Gallery; if you have not yet assigned a thumbnail image to an outfit, it is shown as a folder image with a clothing hanger on it. There are three ways to assign a thumbnail image to one of your outfits: Upload a photo You can upload an image from your computer to be used as the thumbnail for an outfit. The aspect ratio should be 1:1, such as a 256x256 pixel image. Open the Appearance window to the Outfit Gallery tab by choosing Me > Appearance... from the top menu bar of the Second Life Viewer. Right-click the outfit for which you'd like to upload an image and select Upload Photo (L$10). Choose an image file to upload from your computer. The file is uploaded to Second Life and automatically set as the thumbnail for your selected outfit. You can also now access this image in the Textures folder of your Inventory window if you wish to use it again later. Select a photo from your inventory You can select a thumbnail image from your inventory in Second Life rather than uploading or creating a new image. This method is useful if you already have a good image of your outfit in your inventory and you'd like to avoid spending L$10 on uploading a new image or taking a snapshot. Open the Appearance window to the Outfit Gallery tab by choosing Me > Appearance... from the top menu bar. Right-click the outfit for which you'd like to select an image and choose Select Photo. Choose a saved texture or snapshot from the Select Photo window, which automatically opens to the Textures folder of your Second Life inventory, then click OK. The image is set as the thumbnail image for your selected outfit. Take a snapshot You can use the Outfit Gallery to take a specialized snapshot at the correct size and 1:1 aspect ratio for use as an outfit thumbnail. Frame your avatar on the screen as you would like it to appear for the thumbnail image. Open the Appearance window to the Outfit Gallery tab by choosing Me > Appearance from the top menu bar. Right-click the outfit for which you'd like to take a snapshot, then choose Take a Snapshot. The Outfit Snapshot window opens, showing a preview of the snapshot image. If you are unhappy with the way the image looks, you can re-frame the snapshot and press the Refresh button to recapture the preview. Press the Upload (L$10) button to upload your snapshot and set it as the thumbnail for your selected outfit. For additional information and tips on using the snapshot tool in Second Life, see Taking inworld snapshots. Wearing a saved outfit You may either replace or add to your current outfit, depending upon both your current outfit and the outfit you'd like to wear. Replacing your outfit You may replace your current outfit, which means that all parts of your existing avatar are removed and replaced with the saved outfit. This is most useful when your outfit includes a complete set of body shapes, parts, and attachments that may not necessarily work with your current outfit, such as when changing from a human avatar to a creature avatar. To completely remove your current outfit and replace it with one you have saved: Open the Appearance window by choosing Me > Appearance... from the top menu bar of the Second Life Viewer. On the Outfit Gallery or My Outfits tab of the Appearance window, right-click the name of the outfit you wish to wear and choose Wear - Replace Current Outfit to replace your current outfit. Adding to your outfit You may add to your current outfit, which means that the contents of the saved outfit are added to your avatar without removing your previous outfit. This is useful for adding specific clothing parts to your existing outfit, such as an overcoat that includes several avatar attachments. To add an outfit to your current appearance without removing your current outfit: Open the Appearance window by choosing Me > Appearance... from the top menu bar of the Second Life Viewer. On the Outfit Gallery or My Outfits tab of the Appearance window, right-click the name of the outfit you wish to wear and choose Wear - Add to Current Outfit.
  8. 5 points
    Introduction to avatars in Second Life Using the Avatar Picker to choose a pre-made avatar Customizing a classic style avatar Understanding and customizing rigged mesh-style avatars Getting a rigged mesh avatar from the Second Life Marketplace In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano Português Русский Türkçe 日本語 Introduction to avatars in Second Life Your avatar is your representative in the world of Second Life. By controlling your avatar, you can explore, interact with the Second Life world, and communicate with other avatars controlled by Second Life users. Because avatars represent you, they are an important form of self-expression and the first thing many new users want to do after arriving in Second Life is customize their avatar's appearance. There are many, many options for customizing your look, and there is a huge market for user-designed body shapes, clothing, makeup, hairstyles, accessories, and even complete avatars. This article will help you take your first steps toward finding a style that you and your avatar can be proud of. Using the Avatar Picker to choose a pre-made avatar If you are not yet comfortable with Second Life's editing tools or don't have the time to shop for a custom avatar, the Avatar Picker provides a very easy interface for choosing a high quality, professionally designed avatar model. These avatars are provided by Second Life maker Linden Lab free of charge, and you can try as many as you want, whenever you want! To use one of these pre-made avatars, follow these steps: Select Me > Choose an avatar from the top menu bar in the Second Life window. In the Choose an Avatar window that opens, click a category tab to see a preview of avatars in that category. The available categories may change over time as new avatars are added or removed. Click the image of your desired avatar to immediately wear that avatar. Custom animation overriders and pre-made avatars Some avatars in the Avatar Picker use a scripted attachment called an animation overrider (AO for short) to replace Second Life's default avatar animations for moving, sitting, and standing idle. Under most circumstances, you won't need to interact with this attachment; it's a small invisible cube attached to your avatar's chest attachment point, and it overrides your avatar's animations automatically. When you start to customize your avatar with new clothing and attachments, you may find that a new attachment has replaced the AO on your avatar's chest attachment point, in which case your avatar will revert to using Second Life's default animations. You may also acquire a third-party AO from one of Second Life's many merchants, either individually or as part of a larger package. If multiple animation overriders are attached to your avatar, their scripts and animations can conflict and cause your avatar to move in undesirable ways. If you prefer to use a third-party AO or Second Life's default animations, you can remove a pre-made avatar's AO by doing the following: Click the Appearance button in the Second Life Viewer. Click the Wearing tab in the Appearance window that appears. Find the AO attachment in the list, which will be named differently depending upon which avatar you have chosen. It may be called: Animation Overrider - Female, Animation Overrider - Male, or Animation Overrider - Zombie. Right-click the name of the animation overrider and choose Detach to remove the AO. Customizing a classic style avatar It is important to know that customizing a "classic" avatar in Second Life works a bit differently than customizing other types of avatars. A classic avatar is a humanoid avatar that has been created and customized using a combination of the built-in body part sliders, texture-based clothing, and avatar attachments. Classic avatars give you a lot of control over the details of your avatar's appearance, but are not designed to take advantage of recent developments in computer graphics technology, such as rigged mesh or normal and specular mapping. For detailed information on how to edit the many parts and features of a classic avatar, see the article Customizing a classic style avatar. Understanding and customizing rigged mesh-style avatars In addition to the "classic" avatars, you have the option of selecting one of the many newer rigged mesh-style avatars. These consist of a custom 3D mesh character model that is worn as an attachment and overlaid on top of the skeleton of a classic avatar. The classic avatar itself is typically hidden by an alpha mask, but the uploaded 3D model still makes use of the classic avatar's joints and animations. This type of avatar allows 3D content creators to design models in a third-party tool such as Maya or Blender, allowing them to take advantage of the latest graphics updates to Second Life and create highly detailed human and non-humanoid avatar forms. However, due to their nature as an overlay on top of a hidden classic avatar, mesh avatars may not wear the texture-based clothing made for classic avatars. Mesh avatars may also have difficulty interacting with attachments, accessories or animations that were originally intended for classic avatars; for help finding appropriate clothing, see Buying clothing that fits your avatar. Getting a rigged mesh avatar from the Second Life Marketplace Because mesh avatars are designed by a variety of content creators, the process of obtaining and wearing a mesh avatar may vary greatly by merchant; the following is a generic scenario: Visit the Second Life Marketplace and purchase a mesh avatar. Make sure that the listing claims "Mesh: 100% Mesh" on the right side of the screen underneath Permissions. If your purchase came in a box, open and unpack the box as described in Opening boxes. If your purchase was not boxed, skip this step. Find the new folder in your inventory containing your purchase and read the included notecards. Most merchants include instructions on how to properly wear, customize, and operate their avatars. If no instructions are included, right-click the folder and choose Replace Current Outfit. This removes all attachments your avatar is wearing and replaces all parts of your avatar with the entire contents of the folder. Be aware that many mesh avatars come with interchangeable parts that should not be worn at the same time, so you may need to remove the duplicate attachments manually if you Replace Current Outfit. Tip: If at any time you feel you are unhappy with the outcome of your avatar modifications, you can start over with a fresh default avatar by choosing from the Avatar Picker.
  9. 5 points
    How it works When is an object's land impact calculated using the new algorithm? How to find an object's land impact rating In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Português Italiano 日本語 Land impact is Second Life's mechanism for calculating the computational weight of an object against land usage limits. All mesh objects, all objects that contain mesh content, and all objects with a physics shape type other than Prim use an algorithm for determining land impact that is not dependent upon the number of prims in the object. By using an algorithm that considers each object's impact on Second Life's performance, we make sure that mesh objects and traditional prim objects receive fair shares of Viewer and server resources, encouraging content creators to continue designing performance-efficient objects even if they're working with uploaded meshes. Tip: The terms land impact and land capacity replace prim count and prims parcel supports, but the numerical values remain the same for legacy objects made only of standard prims. Therefore, a linked object composed of 42 normal prims with their physics type set to Prim has a land impact of 42. How it works For each object in the Second Life world, Second Life compares three important performance factors: download weight, physics weight, and server weight. It then chooses the highest of these weights and assigns it to the object as that object's land impact rating. Here's a very quick overview of the different weights; for more information on each, follow the links below: Download weight: Calculated by determining how much bandwidth is required to download and view the object. Larger and more visually complex objects have a higher download weight. You can reduce the download weight of complex objects by generating or uploading less complex meshes for differing levels of detail when you upload a model. Physics weight: Calculated by determining the complexity of the object's physics model. You can reduce the complexity of a mesh's physics model by using the analysis and simplification tools in the Upload Model window, by uploading your own less-detailed physics model, or by choosing a different physics shape type, such as Convex Hull, on the Features tab of the Build Tools window. Vehicles must have a physics weight of 32 or lower, but may have higher download or server weights. Server weight: Measures the impact an object has on Second Life's server resources. Objects that are composed of many prims and have physics enabled and/or contain scripts tend to have high server weights. When is an object's land impact calculated using the new algorithm? Legacy prim objects have a land impact rating equal to the number of prims they contain. However, any object's land impact is calculated using download, server, and physics weights if it meets any of the following conditions: The object is an uploaded mesh. The object is linked to an uploaded mesh. The object, or any part of the object, has a physics shape type other than Prim. You can change this on the Features tab of the Build Tools window. The object has a normal or specular map applied to it. How to find an object's land impact rating When an object is rezzed inworld, you can find its land impact rating by editing it and viewing the Build Tools window. Next to the number of objects you have selected, a number labeled "land impact" indicates the land impact rating. You can view detailed information about your selection, including prim count, weights, and land impact, by clicking the More info link in the Build Tools window.
  10. 4 points
    Benefits of premium membership Upgrading to a premium account Linden Homes Linden dollar rewards Sign-up bonus Weekly Linden dollar rewards (stipend) Stipends for old accounts Premium virtual goods (gifts) How to get your premium virtual good Object permissions on premium virtual goods How to get help for premium virtual goods Frequently asked questions I didn't receive the previous virtual good, and the kiosk only provides the most recent one. Can I get the one I missed? Can I take multiple copies of a good from the kiosk? I accidentally deleted my premium virtual good. Can I get it back? Premium sandboxes Other premium benefits Live chat support Right to own land in popular mainland areas Immediate access to adult-only areas Increased number of group memberships Preferred access to highly populated regions Downgrading or canceling your premium membership Downgrading from premium to a basic membership Canceling your account You may still be charged for land In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano Português Русский 日本語 Benefits of premium membership Premium membership provides the following benefits: Your own private Linden Home Linden dollar rewards Exclusive virtual goods Premium-only sandboxes Live chat support The right to own mainland parcels in popular areas Immediate access to adult-only areas Maximum number of group memberships increased from 42 to 70 Preferred access to highly populated regions, utilizing increased region capacity Access to premium-only events and experiences Voice morphing Cap on missed instant messages increased from 15 to 80 L$ transaction history increased from 32 days to 90 days Upgrading to a premium account To upgrade from basic to premium membership: Log into the Second Life website. On the left side of the screen, click Premium Membership. The Change Membership Plan screen opens, displaying a chart of Membership plans and prices. Select Premium (choose from Monthly, Quarterly, or Annual billing options). Click Save Changes. Your new plan becomes effective at your next billing date. Note: As a Premium member, you get a one-time bonus of L$1000 and receive a weekly stipend of $L300 and a 1024 square meter premium tier bonus. You may only receive the L$1000 upgrade bonus once per account. Linden Homes Linden Homes are ready-to-move-in homes that belong to a themed community and are available only to premium account members. Note: Linden Homes are available only to Residents at least 18 years old. For more information on Linden Homes, see Overview of Linden Homes. Linden dollar rewards As a premium member, you get a sign-up bonus and a weekly stipend of Linden dollars. Sign-up bonus When you first register for a premium account, you'll receive a sign-up bonus of L$1,000 deposited directly into your Second Life account once your premium membership has been active for 45 consecutive days. Sign-up bonuses are only granted to an account the first time the account becomes a Premium member (and remains so for 45 days). Weekly Linden dollar rewards (stipend) As a premium member, you receive a weekly stipend of $L300, whether you log in or not. Stipends are paid every week on Tuesdays. Payments are based on information gathered from the database as of the preceding Monday. For example: If you create a premium account on Monday, April 14, you will receive your first stipend on Tuesday, April 15. If you create a premium account on Tuesday, April 15, you will receive your first stipend on Tuesday, April 22. Due to technical issues, stipend payments may appear late in the day on Tuesdays or very occasionally on Wednesday; if you believe your stipend is late, it's worth checking the Status Blog to see if stipend payments for the week have been delayed. Note: Premium accounts which are currently delinquent will not receive their stipends while the account is past due; instead, the stipends will be placed on hold and automatically delivered after the account is no longer delinquent. (It may take up to 24-48 hours for held stipends to arrive after a balance is cleared). Stipends for old accounts The stipend amount for older accounts depends on what type of account you have and its age. Premium accounts created or upgraded from basic: On or after November 1, 2006 receive L$300 per week. Between July 21, 2006 and November 1, 2006 receive L$400 per week. Before July 21, 2006 receive L$500 per week. Certain old basic accounts get a stipend; basic accounts created Before May 29, 2006 receive a stipend of L$50 per week, if they log in that week. After May 29, 2006 do not receive a weekly stipend. Premium virtual goods (gifts) As a premium member, you periodically get an premium virtual good as a benefit. The premium virtual goods are designed by Residents commissioned by Linden Lab. How to get your premium virtual good To get your premium virtual good, go to one of the inworld vending kiosks listed in the Second Life Destination Guide: http://secondlife.com/destinations/premium/gifts. If you are logged in to the website, go to https://secondlife.com/destinations/premium/gifts instead. To use one of the kiosks: Right-click the kiosk. Choose Buy. (You won't be charged—the item is free for premium account holders.) The item is transferred to your inventory. The inworld vending kiosks only provide the latest premium virtual good. You cannot get older ones. Object permissions on premium virtual goods Premium virtual goods are no modify, no transfer, copy, meaning you can make copies but cannot modify or transfer the items. For general information on object permissions, see Object permissions. How to get help for premium virtual goods Premium virtual goods are commissioned by Linden Lab and designed by Residents. Please do not contact the creator for support. Each premium virtual good comes with an FAQ notecard to help you get started and answer common questions. If you still have an unanswered question, email premium_feedback@lindenlab.com. We will update the notecard as needed, but cannot provide individual responses. Frequently asked questions I didn't receive the previous virtual good, and the kiosk only provides the most recent one. Can I get the one I missed? No, the premium gift vending kiosks only provide the current premium virtual goods. Can I take multiple copies of a good from the kiosk? Yes! As a premium member, you can take as many copies of the premium virtual good as you like. I accidentially deleted my premium virtual good. Can I get it back? Yes. As long as the next premium virtual good has not been distributed, you can get it from an inworld kiosk. Premium sandboxes A sandbox is an area put aside for building practice. Much like real sandboxes and conceptual sandbox games, these are spaces of creativity and chaos. For more information on sandboxes, see Building tips. Several sandboxes exist for specific purposes—such as the Weapons Testing Sandbox—but the majority are simply for regular building. Signs within each sandbox area make it clear what kind of activities are allowed there. Sandboxes usually have auto-return enabled to clean themselves several times a day; look for auto-clean information before building, so you aren't caught by surprise. Since sandboxes are experimental, they may also be unstable—be sure to take regular inventory backups of anything that's important. Premium sandboxes are accessible only to Residents with premium membership. Each sandbox is made up of four regions. Generally, there is one sandbox per Linden Home continent. Find the premium sandboxes through the Second Life Destination Guide: http://secondlife.com/destinations/premium/sandboxes. Other premium benefits Premium membership provides additional benefits: Live chat support Residents with premium accounts may initiate a live chat for support issues via the support portal. Basic accounts do not qualify for this kind of support. Right to own land in popular mainland areas Residents with a premium account can buy mainland parcels and need to pay a monthly tier when their land exceeds 1024m². For more information, see Land Use Fees. The mainland is the largest connected land-mass in Second Life, consisting of hundreds of regions connected to one another with roads, railroads and open oceans. Being a premium member is a prerequisite for owning mainland parcels. Immediate access to adult-only areas Linden homes and some adult areas are accessible only to those 18 years and older. If you are 18 years or older when you sign-up for a premium membership you will automatically have access to these areas. For more information, see Age-restricted content and Accessing Adult land and content. Increased number of group memberships Residents with a premium account may be a member of up to 70 groups at a time. Basic accounts may only join up to 42 groups. Preferred access to highly populated regions Regions in Second Life have a bonus capacity to allow region owners, estate managers, and Residents with Premium accounts to enter an otherwise full Region. The default limit on the number of avatars allowed in a region is as follows: Full Regions support an extra 10% (100 to 110) Homesteads support an extra 25% (20 to 25) Open Spaces support an extra 20% (10 to 12) For full details on access to bonus region capacity, see Improved Region Capacity and Access on the Second Life Blog. Downgrading or canceling your premium membership Downgrading from premium to a basic membership To downgrade your premium or Concierge account to basic, follow these steps: Log into the Second Life website. On the left side of the screen, select Premium Membership. The Change Membership Plan screen opens, displaying a chart of Membership plans and prices. Select Basic Account. Click Save Changes. Your new plan becomes effective at your next billing date. Warning: If you downgrade to a basic account, you will lose all the land you own, and you will no longer have access to your weekly Linden dollar stipend or live chat support. Make sure to sell all your land before you downgrade! You may also wish to check your group land contributions and make arrangements to keep your group's land holdings in good standing. Note: If you are a member of more than 42 groups, you will not lose any group memberships when you downgrade. However, you may not join any new groups with a basic account until you reduce your group memberships to fewer than 42. Canceling your account When you cancel your account, it is deactivated and you will lose access to it at your next billing review date. If you're thinking about canceling your account entirely, consider leaving it active with a basic membership, which costs nothing to maintain. If at some point in the future you should choose to revisit Second Life, your avatar and your inventory will be here waiting for you. You can cancel your account by going to the Delete Account page after logging in with your Second Life username and password. This link is also accessible through the Account section on the left of your Dashboard. Once logged in, select the reason why you have chosen to delete your account and then find the Cancel Account button at the bottom of the page. Your account will remain open until your billing review date, as account maintenance fees are paid in advance. Tip: If you want to keep your name, avatar, and inventory for possible future use but don't want to pay the reactivation fee, you can downgrade to a free basic account instead of canceling your account altogether. You may still be charged for land If you cancel or downgrade your account from premium, you may still be charged for your current month's land holdings. As stated on the Land Pricing & Use Fees page: Thus you are always charged for your premium membership and the maximum amount land you owned during the current billing cycle, regardless of whether you cancelled your account before the end of the month. Note: When you cancel your account, it remains active until the end of your payment period. You may still log in and use Second Life during this time. For instance, if you buy a yearly Second Life membership and cancel it the next day, you are still be treated as a premium member for the next year!
  11. 4 points
    US dollar balance Ways to use your US dollar balance Pay for Second Life expenses Process credit (withdrawal) Wire transfers Sending money to Linden Lab Receiving money from Linden Lab In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano Português Pусский Türkçe 日本語 US dollar balance Note: As of August 1, 2019, your US dollar balance is managed by Tilia, a subsidiary of Linden Lab. For additional details about Tilia and how it interacts with your Second Life account, please see the Tilia FAQ. All Second Life® accounts have both a Linden dollar balance and a US dollar balance. You can see both balances in the Linden Dollar Summary and Tilia Account Summary on your Account page at secondlife.com. When you have a new Second Life account, your US dollar balance is $0. You can increase your US dollar balance by selling L$ on the LindeX. The L$ can be used to make purchases inworld or on the Second Life Marketplace; the US$ can be used for other purposes related to your account. Using your US dollar balance You can put your US dollar balance to work in several ways, explained below. Pay for Second Life expenses When you pay your premium membership fee, land use fees, private estate fees, buy Linden dollars or buy a Private Region, Linden Lab charges your US dollar balance. If your US dollar balance does not cover your expenses, all available US$ credit is applied to the fee. Then we charge the remainder via your preferred payment method. (Bill the full amount to your payment method by clicking "DON'T USE" next to your USD balance.) If you make enough Linden dollars, you can sell them on the LindeX to increase your US dollar balance. Some Residents' premium accounts pay for themselves! Process credit (withdrawal) Update: As of June 6, 2016, Turkish Second Life Residents are unable to use PayPal to process credit on their US dollar balances. It is, however, still possible for Turkish Residents to make purchases or to process credit using Skrill. For more information about PayPal's suspension of operations in Turkey, please visit PayPal's website (in Turkish). Net proceeds from your sales of Linden Dollars remain as credit on your Second Life account, and this credit is automatically applied to your account fees as described above. If you do not wish to apply your Linden Dollar sales proceeds to your fees, you may withdraw this portion of your account credit through a real-world credit process. (See Process Credit) Note that you may only process credit due to net proceeds from sales of Linden Dollars. Purchases of account credits and credits due to gift codes or other promotional account credits are nonrefundable, and may not be processed as a payment to you. You must be in full compliance with our Terms of Service to receive any payment through the credit payment process. This includes, without limitation, the requirement to have accurate and complete registration information, including verifiable billing information. Under certain circumstances, Linden Lab may request additional information from you before processing a request. If provided in a timely manner, this extra step should not significantly delay processing times. Additionally, you must be in compliance with Tilia's Terms of Service and provide Tilia with adequate documentation for ID verification in order to process credit. Tilia is a subsidiary of Linden Lab that offers certain financial services to the Second Life community and helps Second Life comply with U.S. laws and regulations. For additional information about Tilia and the documentation required for ID verification, please see the Tilia FAQ. The following table provides an estimate for when you should receive your USD in your account based on the day of the week you submit your request. You should expect to see the USD in your account on or before the date listed. For most requests, you should receive payment to your PayPal or Skrill account within two business days. However, for a minority of requests, this process may take five business days. Business holidays in the US will extend the two or five business day window by one day. Requested Day Two Business Days later Five Business Days Later Monday Wednesday Following Monday Tuesday Thursday Following Tuesday Wednesday Friday Following Wednesday Thursday Following Monday Following Thursday Friday Following Tuesday Following Friday Saturday Following Wednesday Following Monday (Eight calendar days later) Sunday Following Wednesday Following Monday (Seven calendar days later) How can I withdraw USD credit from my account balance? You may choose to credit your US dollar balance to a PayPal or Skrill account. This is known as a process-credit request, because you are requesting to process credit from the Second Life system to your real-world account. Depending on which option you choose, you may be subject to fees and minimum withdrawal amounts. How do I select a payout method? When you request to process a credit from Second Life to your real-world account using the new system, you will be required to choose a payout method. To place a process-credit request to PayPal, you will need to select your PayPal email address from the request form. The form lists the PayPal account(s) you currently have on file at secondlife.com, as well as the PayPal account that you used for process-credit requests (if you have made previous requests in the old process-credit system). To place a process-credit request to Skrill, you need to select your Skrill email address from the request form. The form lists the Skrill account(s) you currently have on file at secondlife.com, as well as the Skrill accounts that you used for process-credit requests (if you have made previous requests in the older process-credit system). Choose one of the existing accounts, or add a new PayPal/Skrill account as a payment method in the Change Payment Method window: Note: If you change your payout method, we may require additional information to verify your identity before we process the request. This verification is for your security. Can I send funds to someone else's PayPal or Skrill account? Process-credit requests must be sent to a PayPal or Skrill account that you control. They are not meant to be used to pay someone else. Is there a minimum or maximum amount? The minimum process-credit amount allowed is $10, plus any fees. The maximum amount per transaction is $9,999 minus fees. If necessary, you can process a larger amount over multiple smaller transactions. If you are permanently closing your account, you may request a withdrawal of the full US dollar balance, even if it is less than $10. This is the only circumstance where the $10 minimum does not apply. To begin this process, please contact Support for assistance. How much does it cost to process credits? There is a fee per process-credit transaction. Fees are subtracted from the amount you enter in the form, so you will receive less than that amount in your PayPal or Skrill account. You can view the relevant fee amounts on the Transaction Fees and Payment Priority page. How long does it take to process credits? For processing a credit to a Paypal or Skrill account, requests generally take up to five business days (Monday-Friday, not including U.S. holidays) to be completed. We always strive for quick turnaround; however, holidays and the volume of transactions may affect processing times. Also, in the event that Linden Lab requires additional information from a Resident, the processing time will depend on the timely submission of the information by the Resident. How can I check on my previous and pending requests? To view a full history of your process credit transactions, see the Process Credit History page. Any recent requests that have yet to be sent to PayPal or Skrill will say "processing" next to the timestamp. If the request looks to have been completed, but you haven't received funds in your PayPal or Skrill account, please contact Support for assistance. How can I cancel a process-credit request? You might have entered the wrong amount or the wrong PayPal/Skrill account information when requesting a credit. If you think you've made a mistake, check your Process Credit History and then contact Support for assistance. You'll need to tell us which request is to be canceled (use the date/time and the amount to identify it). Please notify us as soon as you can, so that we can reverse the request and restore the funds to your account balance. Afterward, you may request the withdrawal again, or you may use the funds to pay Second Life account fees. Wire transfers Sending money to Linden Lab Linden Lab is not currently able to accept payment from your bank via wire transfer. Please pay for balances through credit card, Paypal, or Skrill. Receiving money from Linden Lab Linden Lab is not currently able to support payment to your bank via wire transfer. If you wish to credit your USD balance to an external account, please do so through Paypal or Skrill.
  12. 4 points
    Before you start Registering for and installing Second Life Your first steps inworld Basic skills Finding cool stuff to see and do Doing more Moving on In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano Português Türkçe Русский 日本語 Before you start Important: You must install a standalone program, the Second Life Viewer, to enjoy the rich 3D content in Second Life. The installation process is quick and easy, but your computer must meet the System Requirements. Second Life will not run on systems that fail to meet these requirements. Registering for and installing Second Life Follow this quick three-step process to register for and install Second Life. 1. Choose your starting avatar and provide your account information Your avatar is how you will appear in Second Life. You can choose from a wide selection of avatars, and if you change your mind later, don't worry—you can select a different avatar any time you want! Once you learn Second Life, you can also customize your avatar to your heart's delight, or pick from a vast selection on the Second Life Marketplace. Your username is the account name that you use to log in to Second Life. It has to be unique, so you may not get to choose a simple or common name. Later, you can also choose a display name that everyone sees in addition to your username. For more information, see Usernames and Display names. Warning: Choose your username carefully! Once chosen, you can't change it. Although you can designate a "display name," your username will still be visible, and others may use it to refer to you. Fill in your remaining account details including your email address, date of birth, and password. Make sure to use a memorable security question in case you forget your password! Note: When you create your account, you will receive a message in your email asking you to verify your email address. Verify your address in order to receive offline messages from other Second Life Residents. 2. Choose your membership level Choose a free basic account, or sign up for a premium account for additional benefits. With a premium account, you get your own private Linden Home (if you're at least 18 years old), virtual currency rewards, exclusive virtual goods, and many other benefits. For more information on premium accounts, see Premium membership in the Second Life Knowledge Base. If you choose a basic account now, you can always upgrade to premium membership later. 3. Download and install Second Life To enjoy the rich 3D content in Second Life, you must download and install the Second Life Viewer, an application that runs on Windows and Mac OS. Most web browsers will download the installer automatically; if that does not happen, just click Download & Install Second Life. You may need to run the installer program manually after downloading. Your first steps inworld Now that you've registered for Second Life and installed the Second Life Viewer, you're ready to start your adventure in the virtual world—or "inworld," as we call it. Logging in Start the Second Life Viewer and then log in to Second Life by entering the username and password you selected when you registered. If you have problems logging in, see Login failure in the Second Life Knowledge Base. The first time you log in, you will be in an area known as Learning Island, set up especially for new users. Follow the signs and simple instructions to learn the basic skills you'll need. The following sections describe the most important parts of the Viewer and how to get the most out of your experience. To help you get going, I'll give you a quick introduction to the Second Life Viewer, the program you use to experience Second Life. Basic skills Some of the first things you'll want to learn how to do include: Walking Flying Changing your view Text chatting Changing your avatar Interacting with objects Finding out more about nearby people Controlling inworld media Walking There are four ways to make your avatar walk: Click to walk. Simply click on the ground at the point to which you want to go. If your mouse pointer turns into a hand instead of an arrow, you won't move but will instead interact with the object under your mouse pointer. See the Interacting with objects section. Use the arrow keys. The up-arrow ↑ and down-arrow ↓ keys walk you forward and backward, respectively. The left-arrow ← and right-arrow → keys turn you left and right, respectively. Use the W, S, A, and D keys. The W and S keys make you walk forward and backward. The A and D keys turn you left and right, respectively. Make sure you click inworld first so that the chat field doesn't have focus. Otherwise, you'll be typing chat text instead of walking. Click the Walk/Run/Fly button to open the Movement controls. You can click which direction you'd like your avatar to move, as well as toggle between walk, run, and fly modes. Running To run forward, simply double-click the W or up-arrow ↑ key. To run backward, double-click S or the down-arrow ↓ key. Flying Flying in Second Life is really fun, and it lets you move around much faster than you can by walking or running. To fly, press and hold the Page Up key or the E key. Press and hold the Page Down key or the C key to land. Use the same keys to move through the air as you do to walk. Note: Some regions don't allow flying. In these areas, you'll see this icon in the location bar and you won't be able to fly. Keyboard shortcuts See Keyboard shortcuts for a quick reference guide. Changing your view By default, your view is from directly behind and slightly above your avatar. However, it's often useful to see things from a different viewpoint! There are several ways to change your view: To rotate your view, click and drag anywhere on the world. NOTE: If your mouse pointer turns into a hand before you click, then you'll interact with the object instead of rotating your view. To zoom in, press and hold the Alt key, then click and drag your mouse; or use your mouse wheel. To orbit, press and hold the Alt and Control keys, then click and drag your mouse. Click the View button and use the controls, shown at left. To return to the default view, press the Esc key. Text chatting . Click the Chat button (by default in the bottom toolbar) to text chat with people nearby. Everyone within twenty meters of you will be able to see what you type. To shout, press Control-Enter instead of Enter after typing your chat text. Everyone within 100 meters will be able to see what you type. Click the triangle icon in the chat field to show recent chat history. Mouse over names in chat history and then click the icon for more options. Changing your avatar Click Avatar to change your avatar to one of the free provided avatars. You'll be able to choose from a wide variety of avatar looks. For information on customizing your avatar, see Editing your appearance. Interacting with objects To interact with any object you encounter, right-click it and select from the menu of actions and tools, as shown for example above. Some objects (such as furniture) automatically provide a "sit" icon when you mouse over them. Simply click on the object to sit on it. To stand up again, just click the Stand button that appears near the bottom of the window. If your mouse cursor turns into a hand when over an object, you may be able to interact with the object by clicking on it. In some cases, clicking performs an action (such as turning on a light switch); sometimes, the object displays a special menu that lets you select from a variety of actions. When you hover your mouse cursor over an object, you may also see an information box, for example as illustrated at left. Click on the icon for additional options. Finding out more about nearby people To find out about those nearby, mouse over their avatars and click the icon that appears. You'll get an information box with: Their avatar name and how long they've been in Second Life. Profile "biography" information (if they've added it). Voice chat volume control for that person only. A View full profile link t osee more options and information. See the Using Profiles section. Controlling inworld media Many areas in Second Life have music playing for ambience, or video displayed on an inworld surface. Use the controls in the upper right of the Viewer window to control the volume of the audio or, if you like, to turn it off entirely by de-selecting the box to the right. The Pause button to the left of the main volume control button allows you to start or stop streaming videos or media. You can cover your mouse over any streaming media playing inworld for additional controls. Mouse over any inworld surface displaying video or other media to show special media controls. Finding cool stuff to see and do Click Destinations to see the Second Life Destination Guide. Click on a category, then click on a destination in that category to teleport there immediately. Go to http://secondlife.com/destinations/ to see more categories and destinations. Doing more Once you become familiar with walking, flying, and the other basic functions, you may want to try: Using voice chat Making friends Seeing nearby people and friends Using profiles Using voice chat Tired of typing? Use voice chat to talk to nearby people. You'll need to set up a headset or speakers and a microphone. Using a headset avoids annoying echoes of your own voice. Generally, it's best to connect your audio devices before you start Second Life. After you have connected your headset (or speakers and microphone), you may need to configure your sound devices. To do this, choose Me > Preferences > Sound & Media. You'll be able to select your input and output devices and change your volume setting. Once you have configured your sound devices, simply click Speak to speak to those nearby. Click it again to turn off your microphone. If you're having trouble getting voice chat to work, see Voice chat FAQ. Note: Some regions disable voice chat. In these areas, the Speak button will be dimmed, and you won't be able to use voice chat. Voice dots You can tell if voice is enabled and working properly because you'll see a small white dot floating above your name tag, as shown below. If other people have voice enabled, they will have voice dots as well. Making friends To make someone your friend, mouse over their avatar, click the and choose View Full Profile, then click the Add Friend button. This person will receive a friendship request: if they accept it, then they will be on your friends list, and you will be on theirs. How to accept or decline a friendship offer When someone else offers you friendship, a dialog box appears in the lower-right corner of your screen. If you click Accept, your new friend receives on-screen notification that you have accepted the friendship offer. If you click Decline to cancel the offer, the other person receives a notification that you declined the friendship offer. Tip: Strike up a conversation or have some interaction before asking someone to be your friend—it's good manners! Seeing nearby people and friends Click the People button to open the People window, which has four tabs: NEARBY shows everyone within 100m of you. MY FRIENDS shows your friends list, with those currently online shown first. MY GROUPS shows information on your Second Life groups, which are like clubs. See Groups overview for more information. RECENT shows everyone with whom you recently communicated via instant message or group chat. In all of these tabs, a person's name appears dimmed if they are not currently online. Mouse over a person's name for additional options: Click to see more information about the person; then click View full profile for more options. The mini-map in the NEARBY tab shows a bird's eye view of the area you're in; the yellow dot shows your location, and the green dots represent other people. Zoom in and out with your mouse wheel or right-click the map for more options. Using profiles Click Me > Profile to edit your profile. Use your profile to express your personality and interests. You can also share things with your friends and see things they share with you, similar to social networking sites. You can link your Second Life profile with your accounts on Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, and other popular social networks. To view someone else's profile, mouse over their avatar, click , then click View full profile. You'll be able to see the things they have allowed based on their privacy settings. To configure your privacy settings: Click Me > Profile Click Edit Profile to customize your profile settings. Click the Privacy tab. Tip: Want to add a profile picture? You'll need to save a snapshot to your PC first, or you can upload an existing snapshot. Adding a Profile picture is a great way to show off your avatar. (Remember, profile pictures must be General maturity!) Moving on Once you've mastered the basic skills covered in this article, you're ready to move on to learn the full richness of the Second Life experience. Have a look at the Second Life User's Guide. Most importantly, have fun!
  13. 4 points
    Auction requirements Finding a parcel for auction The bidding process Bidding on a parcel What happens next Creating your own auctions In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano 日本語 Português The Land Auctions page is now part of Place Pages. Here you can find a list of Open Auctions, Scheduled Auctions and Recently Closed Auctions. You may browse as much as you'd like without signing up for Second Life. Auction requirements To participate in an auction, you must be a Premium Member (because you must be Premium to own the Mainland that is bought and sold through Auctions). Your account must also have a verified email address and a Linden dollar (L$) balance sufficient to make a bid. Please log into your account on the Second Life website to verify your email address and upgrade your account to Premium. Finding a parcel for auction You can click the top of each column of auction results to sort by Name, Size, Leading Bid, # of Bidders, Start Time, End Time or Auction ID. Sort by our desired parameters to help you find a parcel that meets your needs. Once you find a parcel you are interested in, click the listing to visit the parcel’s Place Page. Here you can see additional information, such as the parcel’s maturity rating and region location. It is important to check the parcel’s maturity rating, since this determines who can access your parcel and the types of content that can be located there. You can also click the Visit This Location button to go inworld and check it out. Do you like the location? Does the terrain match your needs? How’s the neighborhood? Just like buying a property in the real world, details matter and may be the key to your happiness! The bidding process Bidding uses an auto-bidding process similar to that used on other auction sites. When an auction is created, the seller sets a minimum bid, a bid increment (a multiple of L$10 between L$10 and L$100), and an end time for the auction. To bid, you must specify the maximum amount of Linden dollars you are willing to bid. If your bid is higher than the current leading bid (or the minimum, if there have not been any bids yet), then the auto-bidding system adds the bid increment amount to the current leading bid until either you or the current leader exceeds their maximum bid; the bidder that remains becomes the new leading bidder at that amount. This is repeated for each new bidder until the auction reaches its end time - at which point the current leading bidder wins the auction. Before you place a bid on a parcel, you must have sufficient Linden dollars (L$) already in your account. You can see your current available account balance shown as Your Balance under the “Place your bid” section. Once you place a successful bid, your maximum bid is immediately taken from your balance and held in escrow until you either win the auction or you are outbid. If you win an auction, the land counts against your land allocation and tier fees. Before you bid, be sure you are comfortable with paying any additional monthly fee ("tiering up") that might be triggered. You can review your land allotment by going to Your Second Life Account. You may bid on land that would put you in a higher tier. The system informs you if winning the auction would modify your tier requirement (note that each auction evaluates this based on your current land holdings; if you are bidding in multiple auctions, the land amounts from the other auctions will not be used in the tier calculation). Groups may not participate in auctions either as buyers or sellers. You must bid as an individual, and the land ownership is set to the winner as an individual. Once the auction is over and the land ownership has changed, you may deed it to a Group like any other parcel, but note that your tier obligation may be affected by even the brief period of individual ownership. Bidding on a parcel Choose the maximum amount of Linden dollars (L$) you are comfortable bidding, then enter your bid and press Submit Bid. Once you place your bid, you’ll see a bid confirmation page: If this is not what you intended to bid or you’ve changed your mind, do not click the Submit button. Close the browser window, go Back in your browser, or click Cancel. If you agree and want to move forward, click Submit to submit your bid. You can now see the Auction Place Page and your bidding status. To view your auctions activity, return to the main auctions page and click View my auction activity. Here you can see any open auctions in which you’re participating and any past auction bids (If some entries appear to be missing, you may be viewing an old version of the page; try clicking your browser's Refresh or Reload button). Once you have bid, you cannot decrease your bid amount. The only way to exit an auction where you are the leading bidder is for someone to outbid you. What happens next During the bidding process you receive email updates when you place a bid, when you are outbid, when someone unsuccessfully bids against you, and (if you are fortunate) when you have won. There can be unpredictable delays in email transmission, so you may want to occasionally visit View my auction activity to check the status of your auctions. If you are the leading bidder, all you have to do is wait for the auction to close. If you placed a maximum winning bid and win the auction for a lower amount, the difference is refunded. If you are outbid, we send you an email and return the escrowed funds to your balance. If you would like to bid again to increase your bid, you can do that through View my auction activity. If that really was the most you were willing to spend, there’s nothing more you need to do. “I’m a winner!” Congratulations, you’ve successfully won your auction! Ownership of the parcel is set to you, the auction winner, within an hour after the end of the auction. If there is a problem with the ownership, contact Second Life Support. You can use the Visit This Location button on your closed auction page to get back to your new parcel. Creating your own auctions It is possible for you to create auctions to sell mainland parcels you own, as long as the parcel is owned individually and not by a group. For full information about creating your own auctions, see Creating your own auctions. For more information about land auctions in Second Life, please read our Auctions FAQ.
  14. 4 points
    How to build objects Getting started Editing prims Using Shift-drag to copy objects Using the Copy selection feature Using the Content tab Linking objects Linking The Undo Feature In other languages: Français How to build objects This page presents a short "crash course" on building in the Second Life® virtual world. Getting started You can create objects only on land that permits building. Land that prohibits object creation is marked Building/dropping not allowed: when you are on such a parcel, you will see an icon at the top of your screen as shown in the image at right. To begin building: Right-click the ground and choose Build to open the Build window. You can also press Ctrl+4 or Ctrl+B or select Build from the top menu on your Viewer. In the Build window, choose the type of basic shape (or primitive) you wish to create, then click the location inworld where you wish to build it. The shape appears (typically with a resounding "whoosh" sound). Editing prims Use the Build window to move, resize, rotate and otherwise manipulate inworld objects. Tip: Checking Snap to grid in the Build window forces you to position objects on an arbitrary grid. This is helpful in making sure that objects line up correctly and are precisely spaced. The video tutorial below discusses working with the building grid, which is useful for precision in building. Topics include: Turning on the grid Adjusting grid increments Adjusting grid snap-to increments Altering grid length Snapping objects to the grid How to use the building grid from Torley on Vimeo. Moving Right-click an object and select Edit. This opens the Build window to the Object tab. Choose Move to enable the Position function. Click and drag the red/green/blue axes on an object to move it around. Clicking on the red (X), green (Y), and blue (Z) arrows lets you drag the object only along those axes. Rotating Right-clilck an object and select Edit. Choose Rotate in the Build window to bring up the rotation sphere. Click and drag anywhere within the sphere to rotate the object freely along all three axes. Click and drag a specific ring (red/green/blue) to rotate the object only around that axis. Resizing Right-clilck an object and select Edit. Choose Stretch from the Build window to bring up the sizing box. Click and drag one of the white corner boxes to scale the entire object proportionally. Click and drag a red, green or blue box to re-size a prim's length, width or height (respectively) without changing the other dimensions. If the Stretch Both Sides option is checked, the object's opposite corner moves in the opposite direction. If Stretch Both Sides is unchecked, the opposite corner remains in place. If the Stretch Textures option is checked, the object's textures are proportionally resized together with the object. If unchecked, the textures retain their original size. This means that if you are increasing the object's size, the textures repeat rather than stretching to fill the additional area. If you are downsizing, you will see only as much of the original texture as fits on the smaller object. Entering specific values Under the Object tab (shown above), enter specific X, Y, and Z coordinates to move, re-size, or rotate the object. Changes to these values are always based on the center of the object (the point where the red, green and blue axes meet). Advanced edits The Object tab offers several additional options for editing basic prim shapes. Here are some common examples: Path Cut (begin/end): Takes out a slice of the object along its Z axis. You can specify where the cut starts and ends. Hollow: Puts a hollow center in the object starting from the center of the shape and expanding out. You can specify what percentage of the radius is hollow. Twist (begin/end): Puts twists into the object, warping its shape as well as texture alignment. Taper: Reduces the size of the top or bottom sides (x or y axes, negative or positive) of the prim. Top Shear: Shifts (shears/skews) the top surface of the object away from the bottom. You can shift the X and Y axes separately. Dimple (begin/end): Cuts a hole in a sphere from ring of latitude (you specify the percentage) to the top or bottom of the Z axis. The dimple cuts straight to the origin of the object (leaving a cone-shaped hole). Three useful features You may find the following features useful as you build and move objects: Show Hidden Selection - Choose Build > Options > Show Hidden Selection to see the hidden contours and planes of a selected object. Show Light Radius for Selection - This feature shows the range of illumination for a lighted object. To use it: Right-click the desired object and select Edit > Features. Select the checkbox next to Light.The object is now a light source. Choose Build > Options > Show Light Radius for Selection to see how far the emitted light from the object travels. To adjust the distance of the object's emitted light, right-click it, select Edit > Features, and click the up and down arrows to increase or decrease the Radius. Show Selection Beam - The selection beam is the line of particles you see when you are pointing at and manipulating objects. The feature is on by default, but if you think it gets in the way, you can disable it: Choose Build > Options and uncheck Show Selection Beam. Using Shift-drag to copy objects You can Shift -drag to copy an object you have permission to copy. This isn't obviously stated in the build tools but is a popular way to copy objects. Here's a simple example: Right-click the ground and choose Build. Click the ground again to rez a generic cube. Right-click the cube and choose Edit. The positioning arrows appear. Hold down Shift , left-click one of the arrow heads, and drag the object. You're dragging the original, and a copy is left behind at the original location. Tip: If you use Build > Undo (Ctrl+Z) after Shift -dragging an object, the original snaps back to its original position — a creative use of selective Undo. You can do this to align it another way. Using the Copy selection feature Copy selection allows you to duplicate selected prims and align them adjacent to each other. For example, if you're copying sections of a wall and Shift -dragging to copy is proving tricky to fine-tune, you may want to take advantage of this alternative. To understand how this works, let's use a simple example: Right-click the ground and choose Build. Click the ground again to rez a generic cube. From the Build Tools window, select Create. Check Keep Tool selected so we can do the following steps repeatedly. Click the Copy selection checkbox. For now, check Center Copy and uncheck Rotate Copy. Now, click on the faces of the cube. Each time you do so, the cube is duplicated, aligned edge-to-edge with a previous cube. Here's what the options do: Center Copy - Copies are centered on the target object, which is useful for neat building in-a-line where you want objects to be aligned along an axis. Otherwise, objects will be placed edge-to-edge, but may be staggered or askew. Note that with curved prims like spheres, this means one of the copy's edges is touching the source, but isn't interpenetrating (overlapping). Rotate Copy - Copies rotate to match the target object, instead of the original values the source object has. This can make it easier to line up something that's already at an angle, such as a house's slanted roof. Using the Content tab If you have permission to modify an object, you ca use the Content tab to:: Drag any objects from your Inventory into the Content folder. Copy or move the contents of an object to your Inventory. Permanently delete objects from the Content folder. To add inventory to the object Content folder: Right-click the object inworld and choose Edit from the pie menu (or press Ctrl-3 and click on the object). Open the Content tab (click More if you can't see it). Drag the desired item from your Inventory into the Content folder. To remove objects from the Content folder: Right-click on the object inworld and choose Open from the pie menu. Use one of the following options: Open your Inventory and drag the contents to your Inventory window. Click Copy to Inventory. Click Copy and Wear. Note: If the contents have copy permissions, a copy is placed in your Inventory. If an object is (no copy), the object will leave the Contents folder and move to your Inventory. Select one or more objects (Ctrl-select more than one object), right-click and select Delete (or press the Delete key on your keyboard) to remove objects without placing them in your Inventory. Important: Objects that are not rezzed, but are instead deleted from a Content folder do not go to your Inventory Trash folder! They are permanently deleted. If the object is (no copy), be aware it will be gone if you select it and press the Delete key! Note: Unlike your own inventory, an object's inventory cannot have two items with the same name. If you copy an item with the same name as an existing item into the object's inventory, the new object will be renamed; e.g. object, object 1, object 2 etc. Linking objects You can link several primitives (prims) together to create one cohesive object. A linked object is, for all intents and purposes, considered one object. It has one name, acts as one object (for example, if physics are enabled on it), and it cannot be broken apart unless you Unlink it. However, a linked object still counts as the sum of its prims when determining your land's object limits. One prim of the object is considered the parent or root link. The name of the parent link is the name of the whole linked object. The inventory of the root prim is, for most purposes, the inventory of the whole object. The center (or origin) of the root prim is the center of the whole object, even if the root prim is not the physical center of the object itself. Vehicle scripts look at the root prim's orientation to determine the "front" of the vehicle. As a result, it is important which prim you select as the root prim. Linking Follow these steps to link together two or more prims: If you are not in the object Editor already, right-click any object and choose Edit, or open the Editor with Ctrl-3. With no object selected in the editor, hold down Shift and click on each prim you wish to link together, one at a time. Make the most important prim and/or scripted prim (root) the last one you select (such as the seat of a vehicle). Then, go to the Tools menu and select Link, or just press Ctrl-L. You can select Tools->Unlink or press Ctrl-Shift-L to break the object apart. Be aware of the following limitations: A linked object cannot exceed 54 meters in any dimension. Normally a linkset can have up to 256 prims; sitting avatars count as one prim each. Vehicles, or any physics-enabled object, cannot have more than 32 prims (sitting avatars don't count toward the physical prim limit). There is no nesting of linked groups. In other words, if you link a third object to two objects already linked and then unlink them it will not yield two groups but three. The Undo Feature Second Life's Undo is used to revert certain changes to an earlier state. While selecting an object, use Build > Undo, or the much quicker keyboard shortcut of Ctrl-Z. Watch this video to learn more: How to use Undo from Torley on Vimeo. Limitations Undo doesn't work if you have: Changed any of the texture settings on an object. (It won't switch back to the previous setting.) Deleted an object. (It won't bring it back inworld.) Added contents to an object. (If you drag a no-copy object from inventory into another object's contents, selecting Undo won't take it out.) This isn't all-inclusive; Undo generally doesn't work for most of an object's parameters. What does undo work on? Undo primarily reverts changes made to the position, size, and rotation of an object. For example, if you accidentally move a sofa inside a wall, undo snaps it back to where it was last. As shown in the video above, Undo can help you retrieve objects lost in walls. If you change the position, size, or rotation of an object using the numerical entry fields in the Build window's Object tab, you must click the object again to bring into focus and make Undo work. You can also use Undo when writing notecards or editing scripts; in this context, it functions similarly to a word processor's, and untypes what you last entered. Undo should also work on attachments. Please note that: Each object has its own independent "chain" of undos which remembers multiple steps. Since this data is stored on our servers, you should be able revert changes to objects inworld even after relogging. Remember that you must specifically select an object to undo changes to that object. (You'll see the positioning arrows and a yellow silhouette glow.)
  15. 4 points
    When to file an abuse report How to file an abuse report What happens when an abuse report is filed Retracting an abuse report Abuse through voice chat In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Português Italiano 日本語 Türkçe Pусский When to file an abuse report Abuse occurs when someone violates the Second Life Terms of Service (ToS) or the Community Standards (CS). Every Resident agrees to abide by these rules upon joining Second Life. Some special areas, such as Infohubs, have additional restrictions called the Welcome Area Guidelines. Whenever you see one of these rules being broken and you believe it to be intentional or malicious, everyone present at the scene should file an abuse report. If there are multiple incidents, file multiple reports. File reports on any abuse you witness in addition to abuse that targets you personally. Not every Resident is aware of the abuse-reporting system or remembers to use it, so please help out your fellow Residents! Reports from multiple people underscore the seriousness of an incident. More tips: If you're being pushed or thrown around by scripts, right-click on an object and choose Sit Here. This stops you from being moved. On combat/damage-enabled land, shooting someone with a weapon is not abuse. Look for a little red heart in the menu bar, which indicates your health. If you can see it, you're in a valid combat zone, and weapons fire is permitted. Your avatar can't die permanently: even if you lose all your health, you will simply be teleported back to your home location. Using weapons on non-combat land is usually abuse unless the landowner has clearly allowed it, for example in a role-playing game. If a friendship has gone sour, block the person and remove him or her from your friends list. This will also remove any permissions you may have granted them, like the ability to track you on the map. How to file an abuse report To file an abuse report, do any of the following: Choose Help > Report Abuse from the menus at the top of your Viewer window. To directly report another Resident, right-click their avatar and choose Report To directly report an object, right-click the object and select Manage > Report Abuse. The REPORT ABUSE window opens, displaying a snapshot of what is onscreen at that moment and the relevant identifying information if you selected an avatar or object. If the snapshot helps clarify the issue, check Use this screenshot. Screenshots can be very helpful visual evidence; include them whenever appropriate. If the report is about an avatar or object , click the button to fill in the relevant information automatically. Click Select category and choose a category. If you don't see a category for the particular incident you're reporting, use Select Category > Other and explain in the Details field. The Location of Abuse field is filled in automatically with your current location. Change to specify a different location. In the Summary field, write a concise, one-line summary, much like an email subject line. Be brief yet precise. Use the Details field to give as much pertinent information as possible to help Linden Lab assess the incident. Click Report Abuse to submit the abuse report. Tip: If you don't know the offender's name, choose "Governor Linden" as a placeholder and explain in the report details. What happens when an abuse report is filed You receive an automated response by email. If you need to add more information after submitting a report, please submit a new report. We try to resolve abuse issues as quickly as possible, but response times vary depending on the number of backlogged abuse reports. For privacy reasons, we are unable to share the details of an investigation into an abuse report. Once your report has been submitted, we'll take it from there. Often all it takes to curtail an issue is an official warning. In most cases, a Resident who violates our Terms of Service and/or Community Standards is given several opportunities to rectify his or her behavior before banishment occurs. In all cases, the Resident's discplinary record is reviewed to determine an appropriate response. Serious abuse may result in account suspensions or permanent bans. The length of a suspension is determined by the nature of the abuse, previous violations, and how many people are affected. Tip: If abusive behavior is persistent, file abuse reports for each incident. The disciplinary process works only if we are made aware of ongoingly abusive behavior. Retracting an abuse report If you file an abuse report and later realize that it was made in error, file a new abuse report stating that you do not want the initial one investigated. Provide any other information you think might be useful. Abuse through voice chat If someone is harrassing you through voice, the best solution is to block this person. You can file an abuse report, but it's difficult to provide concrete evidence in such situations, since there are no IM or chat transcripts. For commonsense reasons, we cannot accept recordings of voice chat made by other programs or by holding an audio recorder up to your speakers. There are a couple of ways to mute voice chat inworld: Right-click on the avatar and choose Block. Click the People button at the bottom of the Viewer to open the PEOPLE window. Open the NEARBY tab, select the avatar, and choose Block/Unblock. A small red icon will appear next to their name. Note: If you IM with, pay Linden dollars to, or give inventory to someone you have blocked, he or she is automatically un-blocked. For more information, see Blocking.
  16. 3 points
    What is a baked texture and why would I want it on mesh? Major Features Benefits How it Works Wearable and Bake Channels Universal Wearables Setting a mesh to use baked textures Working with the new channels Working with Animesh Script Support Step-By-Step Example Test Content Known Issues In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano 日本語 Português Bakes on Mesh is a feature to allow system avatar baked textures to be shown on mesh attachments. What is a baked texture and why would I want it on mesh? If you use a standard system avatar, you can wear several texture layers to customize your skin and add tattoos and clothing layers. To save processing time and provide everyone on any system the same view of your appearance, those textures are "baked" by a server into a single combined texture. Previously if you wanted to use a custom mesh body part and do the same kind of customization, the body part would need its own texturing system. In addition, you would usually need to apply an "alpha" wearable to the underlying standard avatar body part to hide it so that it doesn't interfere with your mesh part. With bakes on mesh, you can apply any system skins and other layers to your avatar (you don't need or want the alpha layer), and then tell the viewer to apply the resulting baked texture to your mesh body part. The underlying system avatar part is hidden for you automatically so the alpha wearable is not required. Major Features Any face of a mesh object can be textured using any of the server baked textures. The corresponding region of the system avatar is hidden if any attached mesh is using a baked texture. New texture bake channels have been introduced to give more control over how meshes get textured. A new “universal wearable” is now provided with support for the new texture channels. Benefits Avoid the need for appliers, leading to an easier customization workflow. Avoid the need for onion avatars, leading to fewer meshes and fewer textures at display time. Avoid the need to sell full-perm meshes. The user can customize any mesh that’s set to use Bakes on Mesh by simply equipping the appropriate wearables, without needing to modify the mesh itself. How it Works Wearable and Bake Channels Avatar wearables have traditionally been baked into six different textures (BAKE_HEAD, BAKE_UPPER, BAKE_LOWER, BAKE_EYES, BAKE_SKIRT, BAKE_HAIR) by the baking service. These textures are derived by compositing the corresponding textures in the various wearable items on your avatar. For example, a shirt sets the UPPER texture, and multiple shirts layered together would contribute to the resulting BAKE_UPPER texture. The Bakes on Mesh project added five new bake channels as well: LEFT_ARM_BAKED, LEFT_LEG_BAKED, AUX1_BAKED, AUX2_BAKED, AUX3_BAKED. Unlike the original textures, the system avatar does not use any of these textures. They are purely extensions to allow more control over mesh appearance. LEFT_ARM_BAKED and LEFT_LEG_BAKED are intended to help with making mesh avatars where the left and right limbs have different textures. The AUX channels are general purpose, and could be used for body regions not possessed by system avatars (such as wings) or for other purposes. Altogether this gives 11 possible channels for wearables to use for textures, and for the baking service to produce. Universal Wearables New channels aren’t useful unless there is some way to wear items that use those channels To meet this need, a new wearable type called Universal has been added. The Universal wearable has slots corresponding to all 11 of the new and old bake channels. In layering order, universal wearables go above the skin and tattoo wearables, and below all other types of clothing. Setting a mesh to use baked textures You can now apply these textures to the diffuse textures of your avatar’s attachments: Right click on the attachment, and click edit and from the edit face menu select textures. Click the diffuse texture icon to open up the texture picker. The texture picker has an extra radio button mode called 'bake' for selecting server bakes. The 'bake' radio button mode has a dropdown for selecting server bake textures. When an attachment is using a baked texture, the corresponding base mesh region of the system avatar is hidden. If a mesh face is set to show a baked texture but is not attached to an avatar, you will see a default baked texture. If you are using an older viewer without Bakes on Mesh support, then faces set to show baked textures will also display as the default baked texture, and base mesh regions will not be hidden. The “fallback” textures for the original bake channels. Viewers that don’t support Bakes on Mesh will show these images in place of the baked textures. You will also see these on any non-attachment objects that are set to use Bakes on Mesh. The new bake channels have similar fallback textures. Working with the new channels The new bake channels are handled a bit differently from the original six. With the original channels like upper body, there are several types of wearables that can affect the contents, and there is always a base layer of skin at the bottom of the texture stack. This means that unless you are using an alpha wearable, your bakes will always be opaque. For the new channels, the only textures are those supplied by any universal wearables you have on, so the resulting bakes can potentially be transparent. Note that this is currently the only way to make the new channels transparent, since there is no "Universal Alpha" wearable (we may add such a wearable in the future). If you want a transparent bake in one of the new channels to be used to make your mesh partially transparent, you will need to set the alpha mode for that face to "Alpha Blending". For example, in this case there is one universal wearable with a transparent ring texture. The texture is applied to the upper body and left arm channels. The alpha mode is set to Alpha Blending. Results: The upper body and right arm are opaque, because there is an opaque skin layer at the bottom of everything. The left arm is transparent and the transparency is applied to making portions of the left arm see-through: With the same outfit, but alpha mode set to None, you would see this. Note that now the left arm is opaque with a fallback color showing under the transparent regions: If you add an additional universal wearable with a suitable opaque skin texture for the left arm channel, you would get this. Now both arms are opaque, regardless of whether alpha mode is set to None or to Alpha Blending: Working with Animesh Animesh objects are treated somewhat differently when attached. Because they have their own skeletons, they are textured independently of the avatar they are attached to. An attached animesh object does not support Bakes on Mesh, and will display any Bakes on Mesh textures using the placeholder textures described above. Script Support Bakes on Mesh works by defining special texture ids corresponding to each of the bake channels. There are corresponding LSL constants for each of the channels, so you can also write a script that enables Bakes on Mesh for a mesh face. The LSL constants are: IMG_USE_BAKED_HEAD IMG_USE_BAKED_UPPER IMG_USE_BAKED_LOWER IMG_USE_BAKED_EYES IMG_USE_BAKED_SKIRT IMG_USE_BAKED_HAIR IMG_USE_BAKED_LEFTARM IMG_USE_BAKED_LEFTLEG IMG_USE_BAKED_AUX1 IMG_USE_BAKED_AUX2 IMG_USE_BAKED_AUX3 These can be used in commands like llSetLinkTexture() or llSetLinkPrimitiveParamsFast() For example: llSetLinkPrimitiveParamsFast(0, [PRIM_TEXTURE, 0, IMG_USE_BAKED_UPPER, <1.0, 1.0, 0.0>, ZERO_VECTOR, 0.0]); would set the first face of a non-linked prim to use the upper body baked texture. Step-By-Step Example Here we will convert a system avatar into a simple mesh avatar that uses bakes on mesh: 1. Log in using a Bakes on Mesh enabled viewer. 2. Enable the Develop menu. If not present, go to Me > Preferences, and in the Advanced tab click Show Develop Menu. 3. In the Develop menu, choose Develop > Avatar > Character Tests > Test Male. You will now see a standard system avatar. 4. You will need a mesh avatar to replace this system avatar. In a web browser, bring up https://jira.secondlife.com/browse/BUG-139234 and download the attached file "aditya_90.dae". 5. In the Second Life Viewer, choose Build > Upload > Model and choose the file "aditya_90.dae". In the upload options, check Include skin weight. Set the model name to "aditya_90". 6. Click calculate weights and fee, then upload. You should now have a mesh model in your inventory called "aditya_90". Attach this to yourself by double clicking it in your inventory. 7. At this point you have a mesh, shown with the white default texture, superimposed on your system avatar. Now we need to convert the mesh to use Bakes on Mesh. This will also hide the system avatar as we go. 8. Right click your avatar and pick edit. In the edit dialog, pick “Select Face”. Click the avatar’s chest to select the upper body. 9. In the Texture tab, click the white texture area. 10. Pick the “Bake” texture option and the “BAKED_UPPER” value in the pulldown. Then click OK. 11. Your avatar should now show the upper body correctly textured without excess white material. What you are seeing is the mesh surface textured with the upper body baked texture. The system avatar for the upper body is hidden. 12. Now repeat the process for the other body regions. Select face on the head area and set it to used BAKED_HEAD Select face for each of the eyes and set them to use BAKED_EYES Select face for the lower body and set it to use BAKED_LOWER 13. Getting all the faces selected and modified correctly is a bit tricky. If something gets messed up just try again with any face that gets messed up. At the end the avatar should look like this: 14. The hair looks wrong because it is an attachment that was not built for this mesh. You can get rid of it by right clicking and choosing Detach. At this point, you have a mesh avatar that’s fully configured to use Bakes on Mesh. You can now customize it the same way you would with the system avatar. For example, take off an item of clothing: Or customize something like eye color using the sliders: If you want to return to the system avatar appearance, just detach the mesh: Test Content There is some example content to help creators who want to get started with Bakes on Mesh: https://jira.secondlife.com/browse/BUG-139234 attached file "Aditya_for_BOM.dae" is an uploadable model file with separate faces for the left arm and left foot, so it can be used with the new left arm and left leg channels. https://jira.secondlife.com/browse/BUG-139234 attached file "aditya_90.dae" is an uploadable model that has the original set of faces defined, corresponding to head, upper body, lower body and so on. Left limbs and right limbs will display using the same textures with this model. Known Issues The following known issues are present in the initial full release of Bakes on Mesh: BUG-225518 "The Bake texture on linked objects is shown with a delay of 5-7 seconds when linked objects are added from the ground". This is a lag in the update of appearance for a newly attached object using Bakes on Mesh textures. BUG-227532 "[BOM] some mesh objects render alphas incorrectly using BAKED_SKIRT when system skirt has a transparent texture in local edit modes". This is a transient graphics issue seen when in local edit mode, when customizing your avatar. Goes away when you leave local edit. BUG-227533 "[BoM] alpha layering errors in local edit mode". Some objects may show incorrect alpha masking behavior in local edit. Goes away when you leave local edit. BUG-227534 "[BoM] baked texture offset values on a sphere skew in local edit modes". Transient issues with texture offsets while in local edit, similar to issues seen in previous non-BOM releases. These issues resolve when you leave local edit. BUG-227535 "[BoM] Using the skirt channel in a universal wearable breaks the length of any existing system skirt". If your avatar has a system skirt (skirt wearable), and you are using a universal wearable with a skirt channel texture, then the length of the skirt will display incorrectly as maximum length. This is an issue with the baking service rather than the viewer itself. BUG-227537 "[BOM] When Alpha Wearable is applied, BoM attachments with Alpha mode: None turn red". If you make your avatar invisible using an alpha wearable, and then apply this invisible baked texture to an attachment using Bakes on Mesh, you get a solid color, red, shown on the attachment. Probably this should be the base color of the attachment instead. BUG-227536 "[BOM] Avatar does not cast accurate shadow if Alpha mode = Alpha blending". This is a pre-existing issue with alpha blended objects attached to avatars, but may be seen more often with Bakes on Mesh.
  17. 3 points
    Creating a store Listing items for sale The Marketplace Listings window Version folders Stock folders Creating a new listing Changing versions of a listed item Changing the item associated with a listing Previewing your store Delivering items to the buyer Store managers Third-Party Viewer developer resources In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano Português 日本語 This article explains the basics of how to get started as a merchant on the Second Life Marketplace. Once you are familiar with these steps, check out How to market your products for tips on how to make your business stand out, or learn about Managing your Marketplace store. Creating a store The first step to becoming a merchant is to create your store on the Second Life Marketplace. Your store is where customers can browse and purchase items you have listed for sale. Once a purchase is made, the items are delivered directly to the buyer's inventory in Second Life and the proceeds are added to your Linden dollar (L$) balance. To create your store: Make sure your Second Life account is at least five days old and has payment information on file. On any Marketplace page, click My Marketplace in the upper-right and click Create a Store. Read the Marketplace Terms of Service carefully, check I agree to the Second Life Marketplace Fee and Listing Policies, then scroll down to the bottom and click Continue. (Optional) Customize your store profile to make it more attractive and easier to find. Restart your Second Life Viewer before attempting to upload items to the Marketplace website. Listing items for sale Once you have set up your Marketplace store and restarted the Second Life Viewer, you can begin using the Marketplace Listings window to manage your store's inventory. Make sure you understand Second Life's next owner object permissions before listing your items for sale; these permissions allow you to control how your object may be copied or redistributed after you've sold it. The Marketplace Listings window Video Tutorial: Learning Listing, Version, & Stock Folders The Marketplace Listings window is an extension of your Second Life inventory that allows you to manage all inventory in your Second Life Marketplace store. By dragging and dropping items from your inventory window into the Marketplace Listings window, you can immediately begin setting up new listings, add updated versions of your existing products, and even list or unlist items on the Marketplace Store. You can access the Marketplace Listings window by choosing Me > Marketplace listings from the top menu bar of the Second Life Viewer. Version folders Each Marketplace Listing folder contains one or more version folders that allow you to easily manage updated versions of a product without creating a new listing. Version folders look like normal inventory folders with three lines drawn on them, like this: . Only one version folder may be active at a time for each listing; when a customer buys your product, they receive a copy of the active version folder and its contents. To activate a version folder for a Marketplace Listing, right-click the appropriate version folder and choose Activate. If a listing folder contains only one version folder, it is activated automatically. Currently active version folders are marked by the word "(active)". Note: When you drag objects from your regular inventory to a version folder, they are moved, not copied. This means that they no longer appear in your main inventory and will be lost permanently if deleted from their respective version folder. You may instead copy an item from your inventory to the Marketplace Listings window by right-clicking the item in your inventory and choosing Copy to Marketplace Listings. Stock folders You can use the Marketplace Listings window to sell a limited stock of no-copy items. No-copy items that you drag into the Marketplace Listings window are automatically placed into a stock folder. Stock folders look like normal inventory folders with a grid of squares on them, like this: . Stock folders also show the number of items they contain next to their names. For example, "Example Crate (stock=7)". Each stock folder must be inside a version folder, and represents the sale of a single item in the listing, even though there may be many items inside the stock folder. For example, if your active version folder consists of a copiable notecard and a stock folder containing 25 no-copy objects, each customer will receive a copy of the notecard and one randomly selected object from the stock folder until no items remain in the stock folder. The no-copy items within a stock folder must be of the same inventory type, but may have different names. For example, some identical limited-run items may have serial numbers written into their object names, but they can still be sold from the same stock folder. Note that while it is still possible to sell a limited quantity of copiable items using the appropriate listing field, the quantity of items available from a stock folder is determined by the number of items in the folder and cannot be changed using the Available quantity listing field. When a stock folder runs out of no-copy items, the Marketplace de-lists your listing and sends an email alert reminding you to add more units. Creating a new listing Video Tutorial: Creating a New Listing Follow these steps to create a listing for a new product on the Second Life Marketplace: Open the Marketplace Listings window in the Second Life Viewer by choosing Me > Marketplace listings from the top menu bar. Open your Inventory window by choosing Me > Inventory from the top menu bar. Drag your product from the Inventory window to the section of the Marketplace Listings window labeled Drop folders here to create new listings. It now appears under the Unassociated tab. Under the All or Unassociated tabs, right-click the listing folder containing your product and choose Create listing. The folder is moved to the Unlisted tab and now displays a listing number. Under the All or Unlisted tabs, the single version folder inside the listing folder is automatically made active. Right-click the listing folder or version folder and choose Edit listing to fill out the required listing fields on the Marketplace website. If you try to list your product before filling out the required listing fields, you will receive an error message explaining which fields still require input. Click the Update button to save your listing. On the All or Unlisted tab of the Marketplace Listings window, right-click the listing folder and choose List to list your product on the Second Life Marketplace. You may list or unlist items from the Marketplace website as well. Changing versions of a listed item Video Tutorial: Updating a Listing As you develop updates for your products, you can easily update your Marketplace listings with the new items without deleting the older versions: Open the Marketplace Listings window in the Second Life Viewer by choosing Me > Marketplace listings from the top menu bar. Open your Inventory window by choosing Me > Inventory from the top menu bar. Drag your updated product from your Inventory window to the listing folder for that product in the Marketplace Listings window; this creates a new, inactive version folder containing the updated product. Right-click the new folder and choose Activate to make it the active version folder for that listing. All new sales through the associated Marketplace listing will deliver products from the active version folder. At any time, you can revert your listing to sell a previous version of your product by right-clicking its version folder and choosing Activate. Changing the item associated with a listing Video Tutorial: Migrating Listings & Checking for Errors Under rare circumstances, you may need to completely change the item associated with a Marketplace listing. The most common reason for needing to change the item associated with a listing is accidental deletion of the inventory folder associated with a listing and need to re-associate items with an existing listing. To associate a listing folder with a pre-existing Marketplace listing: In the Second Life Viewer, choose Me> Marketplace listings. Find the listing number in parentheses next to your existing listing. For example, "Example Crate (3757)". Click the Unassociated tab of the Marketplace listings window. Right-click an unassociated item you wish to associate with your listing and choose Associate listing. In the Associate Listing window that appears, enter the listing ID of your existing listing and click OK. The unassociated item now replaces the existing item (if any) in the Marketplace listing. Note that changing the item associated with a listing in this way causes the item to become unlisted because you are replacing the active version folder. You will need to activate a new version folder and re-list the item as described in Creating a new listing. Previewing your store After you have listed at least one item, you can preview your store: On the Marketplace website, go to My Marketplace > My Store. This is how your customers see your store — but it also helps to browse the Marketplace as an alt to really walk in your customers' shoes. Important: To see items in your store that you have listed as Moderate or Adult content, make sure you set Show maturity levels to General, Moderate, Adult when you search! Delivering items to the buyer The Marketplace automatically delivers items for you. Occasionally, the delivery system fails, and a delivery gets lost on its way to the customer. If that happens, you can easily redeliver the item. Store managers A store manager is a Resident you have designated to manage some operations of your store in the Second Life Marketplace. Store managers can perform many of the same actions as the store owner, taking allowing them to take on some of the burden of managing your store. For full details on store managers, see Second Life Marketplace store managers. Third-Party Viewer developer resources There are two API wiki pages targeted at Third-Party Viewer developers. This API documentation is helpful for developers who want to integrate Marketplace features into their Third-Party Viewers, but is not necessary for most Marketplace merchants or their customers: Marketplace API for VMM AIS V3 API
  18. 3 points
    What is a store manager? What can a store manager do? What can a store manager not do? Adding a manager to your store Removing a manager from your store Changing a manager's additional permissions Monitoring store managers' actions Audit logs Email alerts Viewing stores that you manage What is a store manager? A store manager is a Resident you have designated to manage some operations of your store in the Second Life Marketplace. What can a store manager do? Store managers can perform many of the same actions as the store owner, including: Edit the store's details Edit product details List unlisted items View store and product details At the store owner's discretion, managers may also: Redeliver orders Change product prices Unlist products Add or remove revenue distributions Add or remove listing enhancements. What can a store manager not do? Store managers may not: Archive products Add or remove other managers Perform management actions for which they have not been given permission If a store manager does not have permission to change prices, unlist an item, or change automatic redelivery, those fields appear as inactive in the edit and bulk edit pages. Similarly, the associated controls do not appear for store managers that do not have permission to unlist items, add/remove revenue distributions, or add/remove listing enhancements. Adding a manager to your store You may add up to five managers to your Second Life Marketplace store. You must be friends in order to add someone as a store manager. To add a manager to your Marketplace store: Visit the Second Life Marketplace while logged into the Second Life website. Choose My Marketplace > Merchant home from the top menu bar. On the left side of the page, under Store setup, click Edit store information. On the Edit store information page, under Store Managers, click Add Manager. In the Manager field, enter the username of the Resident you would like to make a store manager. (You must use the Resident's full username and not their display name. See Usernames and display names for information about the differences between user names and display names.) You must be friends with the Resident. (Optional) Check boxes next to any additional permissions you would like your store manager to have: Product redelivery - The manager can redeliver orders, as well as change the automatic redelivery option on copy-enabled products. Changing product prices - The manager can change the price of a product. Unlisting products - The manager can unlist products. (All managers can list products.) Adding/removing revenue distributions - The manager can add and remove revenue distributions. Adding/removing listing enhancements - The manager can add, remove, and modify listing enhancements. Click Add to add the store manager to your Second Life Marketplace store. Enter the manager's full Second Life name, then choose additional permissions before clicking Add to add them as a store manager. Removing a manager from your store Visit the Second Life Marketplace while logged into the Second Life website. Choose My Marketplace > Merchant home from the top menu bar. On the left side of the page, under Store setup, click Edit store information. On the Edit store information page, under Store Managers, find the name of the manager you would like to remove and click the Delete button next to their name. The store manager is removed immediately. To remove a store manager, click the Delete button next to their name. Changing a manager's additional permissions In order to change a manager's additional permissions, you must remove the manager and then add them again with the updated permissions. Monitoring store managers' actions You can keep track of your store managers' actions in the following ways: Audit logs Your store's audit logs provide a history of actions taken by your store managers. For each action, you can determine: What action was taken Which manager took the action What product the action affected (if applicable), and At what time the action took place Note: When you add or remove a manager, the action is logged with you as the manager. Your actions are not otherwise shown in the audit logs. To view your store's audit logs: Choose My Marketplace > Merchant home from the top menu bar. In the left column, under Inventory, click View audit logs. The audit logs can be sorted by column by clicking the column headers. Each page of audit logs displays up to 50 entries. From your Merchant home, click View audit logs to view store managers' activity. Email alerts You can choose to receive email alerts when a store manager performs one of the following actions: Changes a listing's price Adds or removes revenue distribution Adds or removes listing enhancements To enable email alerts: Choose My Marketplace > My account from the top menu bar. In the left column, click Email settings. Under Merchant Notifications, set Store manager action alert email to On. Click Save Email Settings. On the Email settings page, you can choose whether to receive email notifications for various store manager actions. Viewing stores that you manage If you are a store manager for one or more stores, you can view the stores you manage by choosing My Marketplace > Manager home from the top menu bar. This link only appears if you have been designated as a manager of at least one store in the Second Life Marketplace.
  19. 3 points
    Starting with Second Life Viewer 4.0, the internal web browser of the Second Life Viewer has been updated to use the Chromium Embedded Framework. This allows content creators to use a much wider array of web technologies in their products for Second Life, including Adobe Flash. However, in order to use Flash in the Second Life Viewer, you must first install a specific version of the Adobe Flash Player on your computer. Installing the Adobe Flash Player for use with Second Life To install the Adobe Flash Player on your computer for use with Second Life: Make sure that plugins are enabled in the Second Life Viewer by choosing Me > Preferences from the top menu bar, then clicking the Setup tab of the Preferences window. Enable plugins should be checked. Visit http://get.adobe.com/flashplayer/otherversions/ using your web browser. Under Step 1, select your operating system. Under Step 2, select FP 20 for Opera and Chromium - PPAPI. Click the Download now button to download the Flash Player installer. Run the Adobe Flash Player installer and follow the instructions onscreen to complete the installation. Restart the Second Life Viewer. You may now view Flash content in the Second Life Viewer's web browser, and on Shared Media-enabled objects in the Second Life world. Note: At this time, it is not possible to play embedded .mp4 files in Second Life using the Chromium Embedded Framework.
  20. 3 points
    Adding attachments to your avatar Editing attachments Removing attachments from your avatar Any object in your inventory can be attached to your avatar and worn as part of an outfit. Examples of attachments include customized hair, jewelry, shoes, weapons, and other accessories. Attachments may contain scripts, but they do not count against a land parcel's object limit. Adding attachments to your avatar The easiest way to add an attachment to your avatar is to click the Inventory button on the left side of the Viewer window, find ithe attachment in My Inventory, right-click it, and select Wear. This causes the object to attach to your avatar at its last known attachment point and rotation; if you position a hat object on your avatar's head and then remove it, it will reattach itself in the same location next time you wear it. If the object has never been attached to an avatar, choosing Wear attaches it to your avatar's right hand, replacing any attachment that is currently worn on that attachment point. If you wish to attach an object to a specific part of your avatar's body, find it in your inventory, right-click it, select Attach To, and then select an attachment point. Attachments move and rotate relative to the attachment point to which they are attached. For example, a wristwatch object attached to your avatar's left forearm moves with his arm, even if you use the Build Tools to edit its location. To wear multiple attachments on a single attachment point, find an additional attachment in your inventory, right-click it, and select Add or Attach To. Add works similarly to Wear but does not replace existing attachments. Editing attachments You can use the Build Tools to edit or adjust attachments on your avatar. However, some building options (such as linking and physics) are unavailable while the object is attached to your avatar. Residents commonly edit attachments in order to fit hair, clothing and accessories properly to their avatars' unique proportions. Removing attachments from your avatar To remove an attachment from your avatar, find it in your inventory, right-click it, and select Detach From Yourself. Objects worn by your avatar appear in bold text in your inventory along with a note showing where each object is attached. You can also right-click directly on the object and select Detach. Note: Remember that you can only remove objects made of prims; you cannot take off any body part but must replace one with another of the same kind, or edit the one you're wearing. For more information, see Editing your appearance.
  21. 3 points
    How to change your preferences to view adult content Getting payment information on file In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano 日本語 Português Pусский Türkçe Land and other content in Second Life is rated General, Moderate, or Adult. By default, new Residents aged 18 or older have access to General and Moderate content, and Residents aged 16 or 17 have access to General content. See Maturity ratings for more information about Second Life's rating system. If you are 18 years or older, you may access adult content after enabling it in your viewer preferences. How to change your preferences to view adult content Even if you are 18 or older, you still need to opt in to view adult content. You also need to use Viewer version 1.23 or later to access the maturity preferences. Download the latest Viewer. Tip: At the top of your Viewer, you can choose Help > About Second Life to check your Viewer version. Log into Second Life, then follow these steps in the Viewer to set your maturity preferences: Choose Me > Preferences (or Ctrl-P) and click the General tab. Choose General, Moderate, Adult from the I want to access content rated: dropdown menu. Click OK. Congratulations! You may now visit any publicly accessible land in Second Life, regardless of its maturity rating. Note: If your preferences are not set to allow adult content and you attempt to enter an adult-rated parcel or region, you receive a prompt allowing you to either cancel the teleport or instantly update your access preferences to General, Moderate, Adult. Getting Payment Information on File Landowners may also restrict access to their land to those with payment information on file with Linden Lab. If you have purchased Linden dollars (L$) or bought something on the Marketplace, you already have payment information on file. If you do not currently have payment information on file, or if you are unsure: Log in to your Account page on the Second Life website. Select Billing Information under the Account section on the left side of the page. Select Add a Credit Card, Add a PayPal account, or Add a Skrill account. Enter either a credit card number, a Skrill account, or a verified PayPal account. Setting up a payment relationship with Linden Lab does not constitute a purchase; you will not be charged for placing your information on file with us. Note: Linden Lab only accepts PayPal payments through Verified PayPal accounts. Please check your PayPal Account Overview page or review the PayPal support documentation to ensure your account is a Verified PayPal account.
  22. 3 points
    Prerequisites Cost to upload GETTING STARTED: Uploading your first model Step 1: Choose a model to upload Step 2: Define visual levels of detail Uploading your own LOD files Step 3: Define the model's physics shape Step 4: Upload Options Step 5: Calculate weights & fee Step 6: Upload Bonus section: Rigging options Wearing a model with rigging In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Português Italiano 日本語 Note: This is a basic walkthrough of how to upload a model. For full details on the parameters available for uploading a model, see Model Upload UI reference. Update: Viewer version 3.8.1.303230 modified the mesh importer to (optionally) improve debug output, perform name-based LOD association, and handle models with many materials. For additional information on this update, see the official Second Life Viewer release notes. Prerequisites Before you can upload mesh objects, you must: Have payment information on file. You can add payment information by visiting the Billing Information section of your Second Life account page. Have accepted the IP terms on your account page. If you are planning to use the beta grid (Aditi), you must also accept the IP terms there, but do not need payment information on file. Have at least one compatible COLLADA (.dae) file on your computer. You can create your own by using most popular 3D software packages, or, if you have the appropriate rights, you can download models created by other 3D artists from online repositories. Try our sample content page for a free model if you're just getting started. You may check your mesh upload status at any time by visiting your account page on the Second Life website. Cost to upload There is a Linden dollar fee to upload a model; the fee depends on the model's complexity. GETTING STARTED: Uploading your first model If you're new to uploading mesh models to Second Life, here's a quick and easy set of instructions to get you started. Don't worry about the myriad of controls in the upload window for now; they're for Residents who want fine control over their model's appearance and physics. For a more detailed breakdown of the upload procedure, keep reading below. To upload a mesh model: Choose a .dae file stored on your computer by choosing Build > Upload > Model. If you don't have any models on your computer, you may download some from the sample content page. Preview your model's automatically generated levels of detail on the Level of Detail tab by clicking High, Medium, Low, and Lowest. Notice how the object's complexity is reduced at each level. Click the Physics tab and choose Lowest from the dropdown menu in Step 1: Level of Detail. Step 2 and Step 3 are not required. Click the Upload options tab and check the boxes for any additional features on your model, such as textures. Click Calculate weights & fee, then review the resource weights, land impact, and Linden dollar upload cost of your model. Click Upload to upload your model to Second Life. Tip: To avoid spending Linden dollars while experimenting with uploading models, you may wish to use the Second Life Beta Grid (Aditi). The Beta Grid allows you to test new features and experiment with potentially costly designs in a safe environment, using a copy of your Second Life account. Actions taken on the preview grid cannot affect your inventory or L$ balance on Second Life's main grid. Step 1: Choose a model to upload Second Life accepts COLLADA (.dae) models, which can be edited and created in many popular 3D modeling packages. If you do not currently have any COLLADA models on your computer, you may download some from the sample content page. To begin uploading a model: Choose Build > Upload > Model... Select the .dae file on your computer and click Open. In the Upload Model window, enter a suitable name for your model in the Model name field. If your model includes textures, check the Textures box underneath the Preview pane to make sure the textures are displayed properly. Step 2: Define visual levels of detail Levels of detail determine what your model looks like from various distances. As you get farther away from a model, it renders in less detail to boost visual performance. Second Life generates these lower detail models by default, but you may use this step to tweak each level or even upload your own lower detail models. You can preview your model at any level of detail by clicking High, Medium, Low, or Lowest. While previewing your model at each level of detail, you may change the parameters used for simplifying it from your original model if you chose Generate from one of the Source dropdown menus. For full details on Triangle Limit and Error Threshold, see Upload Model UI reference. Uploading your own LOD files You may upload your own simplified models by choosing Load from file from the Source dropdown menus. You may wish to create your own lower-detail models in order to preserve critical details that may be lost during the automatic simplification process. The mesh uploader uses very strict naming rules for these custom LOD files: File names ending with "_LOD2" must be used for Medium level of detail File names ending with "_LOD1" must be used for Low level of detail File names ending with "_LOD0" must be used for Lowest level of detail File names ending with "_PHYS" must be used for the model's physics shape Additionally, material names must match exactly between each level of detail. Some 3D modeling programs such as Blender automatically change material names to prevent duplication when multiple versions of a model are loaded into the same scene. Material names are sorted alphabetically upon importing a model from the 3D modeling program of your choice, and may not retain the order they had in the original model. If material order is important to your model, you must name them accordingly. For more detailed information on uploading mesh models with multiple materials, see Uploading a multi-face mesh on the Second Life Wiki. Note: If you need to upload an old model that does not conform to these LOD naming rules, you may enable the debug setting called ImporterLegacyMatching in the Second Life Viewer. Access the Debug Settings window by choosing Advanced > Debug Settings from the top menu bar. Step 3: Define the model's physics shape A model's physical shape, as interpreted by Second Life's physics engine for calculating collisions, can be different from its visual shape. For example, you may wish to simplify a very complex vehicle into a square physical box shape, which allows you to have a visually complex vehicle that requires comparatively little physics computation and does not overtax the region's ability to process moving physical objects. You may upload your own physics representation as a .dae file or you may use Second Life's analysis and simplification tools to generate a physics shape automatically. The quickest way to generate a physics model for your object is to choose Use Level of Detail and select a level of detail from the dropdown menu. This creates a physics model based on one of your model's visual levels of detail. Remember that lower physics costs are desirable, so choose the lowest level of detail that reasonably represents the shape of your model. You do not need to complete Step 2: Analyze or Step 3: Simplifiy unless your physics model is extremely complex or shows red lines in the preview window. For advanced information on usage of the physics analysis and simplification tools, see Upload Model UI reference. Step 4: Upload options Before you upload, make sure to include any necessary optional parameters on the Modifiers tab: Scale: Changes the base size of your model. Increasing the scale increases the resource cost. Include Textures: Includes any textures applied to the COLLADA model. The textures are automatically applied to the Second Life version of the model when it is uploaded. Include Skin weight: Includes any skin weight information in the COLLADA model. This option only applies to models that are meant to move and flex with your avatar when worn as avatar attachments. Include Joint positions: Includes joint position information from the COLLADA file. This option only applies to models that are meant to alter an avatar's joint positions when worn as an attachment. Pelvis Z Offset: Changes the vertical positioning of a rigged model. Step 5: Calculate weights & fee When you click Calculate weights & fee, Second Life calculates the download, physics and server weights of your model in order to determine its land impact and Linden dollar upload cost. The base Linden dollar cost to upload is L$10 plus L$10 for each texture applied to the model, and an additional cost based on the complexity of the model. For more information about weights and land impact, see Calculcating land impact. Step 6: Upload When you upload a model, it appears in the Objects folder in your inventory. As with all objects in Second Life, you can then drag it from your inventory to the ground, or you can wear it as an attachment. Bonus section: Rigging options Rigged models allow you to represent your avatar skeleton as a mesh that conforms to your joints and motions. This means that you can wear a rigged model that changes the length and orientation of your avatar's limbs and animates accordingly. If your COLLADA model contains joint position and skin weight information, you can preview how it will look with an avatar's default idle animation by checking the Skin weights box underneath the Preview pane. Wearing a model with rigging You may wear a rigged model by right-clicking it in your inventory and selecting Wear. You may often wish to pair a rigged model with an alpha mask to hide your avatar's normal shape.
  23. 3 points
    What is Avatar Rendering Complexity How can I determine the complexity of my avatar? Why are some avatars solid colors and what is a JellyDoll? How can I find out if the complexity of my avatar is too high? How can I examine complexity values? How can I reduce lag while still drawing other avatars? In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano 日本語 Português Pусский What is Avatar Rendering Complexity? Avatar Rendering Complexity is a numerical score representing how difficult it is to draw an avatar, ranging from a few hundred to hundreds of thousands. It is affected by your avatar's shape, clothing, and attachments. Since avatars are some of the most visually detailed objects in Second Life, avatars with complexity scores at the upper end of the range can severely impact performance of the Second Life Viewer. Being aware of your own complexity and that of those around you can be an important part of managing the performance of your viewer and how your avatar affects the performance of other Second Life Residents. How can I determine the complexity of my avatar? Whenever you change what your avatar is wearing, or add or remove one of your avatar's attachments, a small notice appears in the upper right corner of your screen to tell you your avatar's new complexity value. If you don't mind that other Residents may not see your avatar and you wish to stop receiving these notices, you can disable the message Warn me if my avatar complexity may be too high in the Notifications tab of the Preferences window, which may be accessed by choosing Me > Preferences. Why are some avatars solid colors and what is a JellyDoll? Avatars can be rendered as solid-colored silhouettes (a special form of impostor we call a JellyDoll) if they exceed the avatar complexity threshold set by the Maximum Avatar Complexity slider in the Advanced Graphics Preferences window. This greatly reduces that amount of work your computer must perform in order to draw complex avatars, resulting in improved performance. The default value of Maximum complexity is determined by your computer's specifications and what graphics level you choose, but can be adjusted manually in the Advanced Graphics Preferences window: Open the Preferences window by choosing Me > Preferences from the top menu bar. Click the Graphics tab of the preferences window. Adjust the Avatar Maximum Complexity slider to your preferred threshold. You may move the slider all the way to the right to make the threshold unlimited. There are other uncommon factors that can cause an avatar to be rendered as a JellyDoll, discussed in How can I examine complexity values? You may also check the Always Render Friends box to always render your friends fully, regardless of the complexity of their avatars. If there are other specific avatars you want fully rendered even if they are over your limit, you can right click them and select Always Render Fully. This specific allowance is only valid for the duration of your Second Life session, so you will need to re-apply it each time you log in. Your own avatar is always rendered fully, even if you are over your own maximum complexity threshold. ✏️ Tip: Some older avatars using the "transparent box" method of covering a system avatar may disappear completely if their avatar is above a viewer's maximum complexity. If you're unsure why someone may be invisible, right-clicking on their avatar nameplate and choosing Always Render Fully should resolve the problem. How can I find out if the complexity of my avatar is too high? When some of the people around you see you as a JellyDoll, their viewer reports that information to Second Life's servers. The servers in turn send you a message to let you know whether or not you are being fully rendered by the Residents around you. This message appears as a notification that also includes your avatar's complexity score, and is updated when one of the factors changes significantly. No specific information is provided to you about which Residents are able to render your avatar, or what their maximum complexity settings are. How can I examine complexity values? You can view the complexity scores of avatars around you by activating a feature from the Advanced menu. To use this feature, choose Advanced > Performance Tools > Show avatar complexity information from the top menu bar. This displays three values as floating text above each avatar: Complexity - The numerical complexity score of the avatar. Rank - How close the avatar is to your camera. The closest is "1", next closest is "2", etc... Attachment surface area, in square meters - This value can, uncommonly, cause an avatar to be shown as a JellyDoll. Each value is color coded from green to red to indicate how it relates to your own limits (values well under your limit are green, values at or over your limit are shown as red and may be in bold font). Values shown in gray are ones for which you have no limit, such as the complexity score of your own avatar. This feature does not tell you how the complexity of your avatar relates to the limits set by those around you. There is no absolute "good" or "bad" value for complexity; just a relationship between each avatar's complexity and the limits of those who are viewing it at any one time. How can I reduce lag while still drawing other avatars? You can reduce the performance impact of complex avatars without resorting to JellyDolls. The setting Max. # of non-impostors controls the number of avatars nearest to your camera that will be fully rendered; any avatars beyond that number will be drawn as an Impostor. An impostor is drawn with fewer lighting and texture effects, making them look less realistic (some people describe it as looking like a cardboard cutout). Impostors are also updated less frequently, which means their animations will not look as smooth as a fully rendered avatar. Drawing more distant avatars as impostors does not improve performance as dramatically as the maximum complexity threshold, but looks better because the impostor avatars retain their visual appearance rather than becoming a solid-colored JellyDoll. You can use both methods together by setting your maximum complexity threshold fairly high, so that it affects only the most expensive avatars, while setting the maximum number of non-impostors so that only avatars nearest you are drawn in full 3D detail. To access the Max. # of non-impostors slider: Choose Me > Preferences from the top menu bar. Click the Graphics tab on the Preferences window. Click the Advanced Settings button in the Graphics tab to open the Advanced Graphics Preferences window. Find and adjust the Max. # of non-impostors slider in the Avatar section.
  24. 2 points
    Overview Why provide billing information? Second Life billing policies Premium membership Land use fees Private region fees Auctions Region rental Linden dollar exchange How to view or change your billing information Adding a new payment method Associating payment methods with payment types Changing stored payment information VAT and changing your billing country Processing credit on your US Dollar balance Accepted currencies and payment methods PayPal Skrill Understanding Transaction History Understanding Account History LindeX Land fees Billing for land holdings Private Regions Mainland holdings Preventing common billing problems General Credit cards PayPal Using PayPal How to setup payment with PayPal Contacting Linden Lab billing support Common issues and frequently asked questions I can't update my payment information I'm having trouble paying—what's going to happen? I paid US$ for something, but it's not showing up yet I get a "Not Authorized" message when entering billing information Why was I charged $1.00 on my credit card? Issues with American Express Why was I billed an additional transaction fee? Issues with prepaid and gift cards I receive an error message when I try to make a Marketplace purchase using my Credit Card or PayPal account In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano 日本语 Português Русский Türkçe Overview Why provide billing information? Although a basic account gives you full access to Second Life and does not require a credit card or PayPal account, if you add a credit card or a verified PayPal account you can: Get a premium level account. Own land. Buy or sell Linden dollars. Second Life billing policies Read the full Second Life Billing Policies, also linked to from the Terms of Service. Linden Lab® will bill your account only under very specific circumstances. All charges are deducted from your U.S. Dollars (USD) balance first, and then from your credit card or PayPal account if your USD balance is insufficient. Premium membership Premium account holders are charged according to the payment plan they have selected. Depending on the plan, charges may occur monthly, quarterly, or yearly. See your Account Summary to find out your current billing rate. To change your billing rate, see the Upgrade/Downgrade Membership page. Land use fees The land use fee (also known as tier) is a variable monthly charge that increases with the amount of land you own in Second Life. For more information about land use fees, see the Land Pricing & Use Fees page. Land use fees are separate from private region fees. Private region fees In addition to the initial charge to buy a private region, owners of private regions pay a monthly fee to Linden Lab. Private region fees are charged directly to your credit card or PayPal account, and are separate from other land use fees. See Buying private Regions for a comparison of private region fees. Note: Private Region fees exclude VAT and GST. Visit the Land Portal for more information about land types and pricing, including access to the Land Store and Auction site. There are fees for certain region changes, such as renaming, moving, or converting to a different region type; see Managing Private Regions for details. Auctions Some land auctions are denominated in U.S. Dollars. Winning an auction incurs a one-time payment, but can cause an increase in your monthly Land Use Fees if the additional land moves you to the next Land Tier. For more information about land auctions in Second Life, see the Auction FAQ. Region rental It is possible to rent an entire Region for a short period of time. The cost of renting a Region is L$4000 per day, paid in full on the first day of the rental. Note that this price is listed in Linden dollars (L$) instead of U.S. dollars. For more information on Region rental, visit the Land Portal. Linden dollar exchange All Residents have the option of trading U.S. Dollars for Linden Dollars (L$) on the Linden Dollar Exchange (LindeX). LindeX charges are generated on a per-transaction basis; you will only be charged if and when you decide to make an exchange. You may also purchase Linden Dollars inworld by clicking the Buy L$ button next to your inworld Linden Dollar balance. For additional information on LindeX transaction fees, see the LindeX: Fees page. Some credit card issuers charge a small fee if the payment settles in a currency that is not native to the card. If you're in the United States and are being charged a foreign transaction fee with your current credit card, try deleting and re-entering your payment method. This should resolve your foreign transaction fees; if it does not, consult your financial institution for details on their schedule of fees. Warning: If you find any suspicious or unexpected charges on your credit card or PayPal statement that appear to be from Linden Lab, gather all available information and open a billing support case for investigation. How to view or change your billing information To view your billing information, see the Billing Information page on the Second Life website. Note: For security reasons, you can only view the type of card affiliated with your account and the last four digits of the card number. You cannot view the full number. On the Billing Information page, you can view your current Linden dollar (L$) and US dollar balances, view and add US dollar payment methods for your account, and set which payment methods will be used for different types of purchases. Adding a new payment method To add a credit card, PayPal, or Skrill account to your Second Life account, click Add a Credit Card, Add a PayPal account, or Add a Skrill account. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up a billing agreement with PayPal or Skrill, or fill in your credit card information accordingly. Once you have added a payment method, it is saved for your account and you can associate it with various types of payments. See the next section for more information. You can also add a new payment method during a transaction, when selecting a payment method. If you add a credit card, PayPal account, or Skrill account in this way, it is automatically associated with the type of payment being made. Associating payment methods with payment types You may specify which payment method you would like to use for each of the following payment types: Buying L$ in the Viewer Buying L$ on the web Buying land, Premium fees, recurring fees To associate a payment method, go to the Other Payment Methods section of the Billing Information page and click Change next to the payment method you would like to use, then check boxes next to your desired payment types on the provided list. You may remove this association at any time by clicking Change next to the payment method, then un-checking the boxes next to the associated payment types. You can also change an associated payment method during a transaction by choosing a different payment method or adding a new payment method for that transaction. Changing stored payment information To change stored information about one of your payment methods, you must delete that payment method and re-enter it. You may delete a stored payment method by clicking Remove next to that payment method on the Billing Information page. VAT/GST and changing your billing country Your selected country determines the payment methods available to you. Normally, you should not need to change your billing country, but you may need to update it if you are traveling or have moved to a new location. You can change your billing country by clicking the Change button next to your country's name on the Billing Information page. Countries and Areas Subject to VAT or GST Countries belonging to the European Union (EU) Norway Australia If your billing country is on the list above, you may be subject to the collection of value added tax (VAT). In Australia, this tax is called the Goods and Services Tax (GST). If you are a business and are reselling, or adding value to Second Life before providing it to a consumer, you may be eligible to provide your government-issued VAT ID number or your Australian Business Number in order to be excluded from the collection of VAT or GST. If you see "Subject to VAT" under your billing country's name on the Billing Information page, you can add your exception by clicking Add VAT Exception or Add Australian Business Number and providing your ID. For more information, see VAT frequently asked questions Processing credit on your US Dollar balance You may request that some or all of your US Dollar balance be credited to a PayPal or Skrill account by performing a process-credit request. Please see the corresponding section of the Account balance article for full details. Accepted currencies and payment methods You may use the following payment methods with Second Life: Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online (non-U.S. Residents only) JCB Diners Club Discover (U.S. Residents only) Visa Electron (non-U.S. Residents only) PayPal Skrill The currencies accepted for payment include: CAD, AUD, JPY, EUR, GBP for non-U.S. Residents, and USD for U.S. Residents Note: If you have had a payment method on file since before December 7, 2011, you may need to remove and re-add that payment method before making payments in non-USD currencies. PayPal To use your PayPal balance when making transactions with Second Life, it must be in USD. You can convert your balance to USD at paypal.com (PayPal may impose exchange fees). Skrill Skrill offers a variety of payment options including Visa, MasterCard, and American Express, along with over 100 local payment options listed on their Payment Options page. For a complete list of currencies accepted by Skrill, visit their official website and view the page on Fees and Availability. Understanding Transaction History You can view your transaction history in two places from your account page on the Second Life website: Account > L$ Transaction History Displays your Linden Dollar (L$) transactions for the selected date range (up to 32 days with a basic account, or 90 days with a premium subscription). You can also download the data in XLS (Excel) and XML format. Linden Exchange > Manage > LindeX Order History Displays: Your Linden dollar and US dollar account balances. Your remaining LindeX™ trading limits for the next 24 hours and 30 days. Your remaining account billing limits for the next 24 hours and 30 days. Your LindeX™ Exchange Transaction History, including both closed and open (unexecuted limit buy or sell) orders. Understanding Account History Choose Account > Account History/Statements from the sidebar on your Second Life account page to access your account history. This page shows all your account transactions for the previous 45 days that involve real-world currency. LindeX For purchases of Linden dollars on the LindeX, you will see two entries: one corresponding to the L$ buy, and one corresponding to the transaction payment. So, for example, this is correct: Time Confirmation ID Note Amount Ending Balance 08/17/2010 08:41:22 102230685019 Customer Payment ($7.75) $23.23 08/17/2010 08:41:22 - LindeX Currency Buy $7.75 $30.94 Because of timing issues these may appear in the opposite order. So, for example, this is also correct: Time Confirmation ID Note Amount Ending Balance 08/17/2010 08:41:22 - LindeX Currency Buy $7.75 $30.94 08/17/2010 08:41:22 102230685019 Customer Payment ($7.75) $23.23 Land fees When you purchase land, pay land maintenance fees, or premium membership fees, you will see three entries: One entry for the payment One entry for the purchase One entry for the VAT charge (if applicable). Time Confirmation ID Note Amount Ending Balance 09/09/2010 09:42:18 - My New Land (Estate: My New Land) $1,029.00 $0.00 09/09/2010 09:42:18 - VAT charge for United Kingdom at 17.50% $180.07 ($1,029.00) 09/09/2010 09:42:18 102234890171 Payment of 814.49 GBP, Visa ending with 1038 ($1,209.07) ($1,209.07) Again, the entries can appear in any order, so the far right column can look different in each case. Billing for land holdings Private Regions As with all US$ transactions, Private Region (island) setup fees first bill against any US$ credit in your account and then against the payment method you have associated with buying land. If you are using PayPal, you may need to adjust your monthly billing allowance. See the next section for instructions. If you use a credit card, you may need to notify your credit card provider of the upcoming purchase. See Account balance for details. Mainland holdings On the mainland, billing is based on peak usage for the prior 30 days. As stated on the Land Use Fees page: Once the peak usage has been billed, your peak usage is reset to the current amount of land you own or have donated to a group. All land owned or donated during the prior 30 days is counted regardless of the amount of time for which it was held. Account fees, which are separate from mainland billing, are based on the user's signup date and are paid in advance. Preventing common billing problems Below are some common causes of billing problems and steps to prevent them. General Make sure that you have payment information on file when attempting to make a purchase. Transactions with Linden Lab require you to specify a form of payment to charge when you make purchases or payments. Credit cards Here are some common reasons for credit card failure: You entered the credit card number incorrectly. You did not enter the billing address or entered it incorrectly. It should be the same address that appears on your bill. You did not enter the name on the card or entered differently from how it appears on the card. Billing Information page. The credit card is not in the list of accepted payment methods (see above) You did not enter the CVV (3 digits on the back, or 4 digits on the front for AmEx) or entered it incorrectly. The card is expired, or the expiration date was entered incorrectly. There are no funds available on the credit card to validate it. We send a US$1.00 authorization to ensure that a credit card is valid. This is not a billing, but the card must have at least US$1.00 available on it to pass validation. Your monthly payment limit is reached, and/or your bank is not authorizing any more transactions. The issuing bank has not pre-approved transactions with Linden Research, Inc. Contact the issuing bank to resolve the problem. If you are outside the US, your card may not be set up for international/overseas transactions (this is very common with Visa Electron). If none of the above applies, contact your credit card provider to determine the cause. You may also contact Linden Lab Billing Support. PayPal Often the initial agreement can't be set up due to an unverified PayPal account. To use your PayPal account with Linden Lab, it must be verified and be capable of making instant transfers. Linden Lab does not accept e-check (bank account) payments through PayPal because they cannot be processed quickly enough to match the instant delivery of virtual goods and services. Therefore, we require that you have a credit card on file with PayPal as a backup payment source, OR that you pay with your PayPal balance in USD. Without a sufficient USD balance in your PayPal account, you will not be able to use it with only a bank account. Be aware of your monthly limits. By default, your monthly spending limit with PayPal is set to US$250.00. You can easily raise or lower that limit. See Using PayPal for more information. Using PayPal How to set up payment with PayPal Follow these steps: Log in to your PayPal account. Click the Gear Icon. Click the Payments tab. Click Manage automatic payments. In the Automatic payments section, if you have any existing billing agreements with Linden Research, select and cancel them. Click the Account tab. Update your information where needed (your PayPal agreement may silently fail if your Second Life account lacks a billing address and email). Then create the PayPal agreement with Linden Lab. You must have funds available in your Preferred funding source (PayPal balance) for any purchase to go through. If you do not have enough funds in your Preferred source, the remaining balance will be drawn from your Backup funding source (bank account or credit card). Note: Regarding PayPal passwords and security: The page where you log into PayPal is a PayPal page. We do not receive this information; PayPal does. Contacting Linden Lab billing support If you have a non-technical issue related to billing concerns, you can call the Linden Lab billing team at the following numbers: US/Canada (toll free): 800-294-1067 Long distance (not toll free): 703-286-6277 Our Billing team is available from 6:00 AM to 2:00 PM PST, Monday through Friday. Common issues and frequently asked questions I can't update my payment information If your payment methods are not updating properly, it often has something to do with the bank or card issuer. Some credit card companies will automatically decline or hold for review international charges (or "online gaming" charges) as a safeguard against fraud. If you are located in the U.S., delete and re-enter your payment method. This will make it go through the domestic processor, which reduces the chances of your financial institution putting a hold on the transaction. Important: Credit and debit cards may require up to 30 minutes to update in our system. Even if you receive the message “your payment information has been successfully updated,” it may take up to 30 minutes for purchases to successfully complete. If your purchase fails, please wait 30 minutes before trying again. If you're having trouble getting a payment method to update: If you have waited at least 30 minutes and are still experiencing failed transactions or information that is still marked as "pending update", please delete and re-enter your billing information or try an alternate method of payment (credit or debit card). To update your billing information: Go to Your Dashboard. Click Account. Click Billing Information. Update your billing information then click Submit. If the update is successful, you will see the message "Your information has been successfully updated". To avoid the risk of failed transactions, please wait 30 minutes before transacting. This allows the payment processor time to fully update. After the second attempt, if transactions are still failing or information is still pending update, contact your credit or debit card issuer: Ask to speak directly to the risk and security department. Explain that you wish to authorize your card for charges from Linden Research and Second Life. While on the phone, clear and re-enter your billing information. The bank or card issuer should then see (and approve) a temporary $1 verification charge. (This verification charge will disappear automatically; you will not have to pay it.) If you are still unable to complete a transaction after following the above steps, please contact Linden Lab billing support for further assistance. I'm having trouble paying—what's going to happen? If we are not able to bill your account for the balance due, we put your account on hold for 30 days. During that period, you can go to your account page and update your credit card information and manually push the charge through to immediately reactivate your account. If you owe a balance for more than 30 continuous days, your account will be placed in delinquency status: you can still access secondlife.com to clear the balance, but you will not be able to access your inworld accounts while delinquent. For more information, see Delinquency policy. At any time, you can convert your account status to basic membership to keep it available to you at no charge. Please note that if you owned land, those charges are billed in arrears, so there may be one more payment due before fees cease to be incurred. You must clear all charges for land owned and land tier donations to avoid additional fees. I paid US$ for something, but it's not showing up yet There are a few things related to Second Life that you need to pay for using US$. These things include: Premium account Land use tier When you've bought these items, you should be able to use them immediately. When something like your land fees are due, the charge is applied to your account. It may show as a negative balance until the next day, because the system hasn't processed it yet. In most cases, the charge is applied overnight in the form of payment on file. If you're having problems that seem to indicate the system doesn't realize that you've paid for something, you should file a support ticket. I get a "Not Authorized" message when entering billing information The institution issuing the card you're trying to use has rejected the attempt to set up a payment agreement. You should contact the card's issuer to resolve this problem. Why was I charged $1.00 on my credit card? We have to attempt a small, temporary charge in order to establish your method of payment in the system. This is not an actual charge, but an authorization that we request from your credit card company. Once the authorization is received, which confirms the account is valid, we then rescind the authorization, which tells the credit card company to remove the temporary charge. At no time is the US$1.00 actually charged, though the authorization may appear on a credit card statement as such. The amount may show as "pending" or "authorized" for a few days, but then will drop off the account entirely, disappearing. You will not have to pay for the $1 charge. Issues with American Express If you're planning to purchase land or L$ through Linden Lab with an American Express card, you should first call American Express and authorize an open billing agreement with Linden Lab. Once American Express has enabled it, you should be able to use your American Express card to buy land or L$. Why was I billed an additional transaction fee? When payments are settled in a currency not native to your payment method, your bank may charge what is commonly called a "foreign transaction fee." This fee is not generated or collected by Linden Lab, and we can't control or cancel it. If you're in the United States and are being charged the foreign transaction fee on your current credit card, you should try deleting and re-entering your current payment method at https://secondlife.com/account/billing.php. This process should stop the foreign transaction fees in most cases; if they continue, you should contact your financial institution to learn the details of your personal situation. Issues with prepaid and gift cards A common cause of payment method failure is the use of unsupported card types. At this time, the majority of prepaid cards are not compatible with our system, even if they bear the VISA/AMEX/Mastercard logo. This includes cards purchased at retail stores, rechargeable credit cards, and bank-issued check cards. I receive the error message "This transaction cannot be completed with your chosen payment method, please purchase L$ and reattempt your purchase." when I try to make a purchase using my Credit Card or PayPal account If you receive an error message when attempting to use your credit card or PayPal to make a Marketplace purchase, please attempt to make the purchase using Linden dollars (L$) as the payment method. To purchase additional Linden dollars to complete your purchase: On the upper-right of the page, click Buy L$. In the Linden Dollars (L$) box, enter the amount of Linden Dollars necessary to complete your purchase. Click Place Order. Return to the Marketplace and check out using Linden dollars as your method of payment.
  25. 2 points
    General information Information for landholders and other stakeholders How venues and content are selected Newcomer friendly Editor's picks and popular places Adult-rated areas Submission guidelines Image specifications Inworld photography resources Contact the Linden Lab editors General information The Second Life Destination Guide highlights some of the best inworld locations and Resident creations. For new and existing Residents alike, it is the place to go to explore and discover what's most exciting in Second Life. Linden Lab keeps the Destination Guide fresh with regular updates, so check back frequently! Venues and content featured in the Destination Guide are not paid placements. The best way to promote a venue, event or business is through inworld Search or the classifieds. The Destination Guide is available several different ways: Directly on the Web at http://secondlife.com/destinations. In the Second Life Viewer: Click in the toolbar (by default, this button is in the bottom toolbar). The DESTINATIONS window appears, displaying the categories of destinations; click through and then click on a destination to teleport there. Click to open the Second Life Search window. Then click the Destination Guide tab and search or peruse the incredible variety of locations and events! Information for landholders and other stakeholders Currently, the best way for a Resident to promote a venue, event or business is through inworld search or the classifieds. We encourage all venue owners to review the guidelines at the Search FAQ for information on how to maximize your presence using inworld Search. Venues and content featured in the Destination Guide are not paid placements. However, we welcome Resident suggestions for cool spots to feature. Some entries included in the Guide are also surfaced on the website for Residents exploring SecondLife.com for the first time. You can submit a venue for consideration on the Destination Guide Suggestion Page. Be sure to follow the submission guidelines below. Note: By nominating a venue, you authorize Linden Lab to use its content. Journalists, publishers, filmmakers, and others interested in Second Life often contact Linden Lab for images of Second Life. Linden Lab may direct these parties to the Destination Guide for promotional shots. How venues and content are selected Selections for inclusion are at the sole discretion of Linden Lab. Criteria favoring selection: The venue is a high-quality implementation of the Second Life experience. The venue appeals broadly to the Second Life community, including new Residents. The venue is exceptional or unique. The venue is being promoted outside Second Life and is participating in the inSL logo program, if appropriate. The venue has a real and active community. The submission includes a compelling and visually interesting screenshot. The submitted description text accurately describes the location. Criteria weighing against selection: The venue or one like it has been included before. The venue has been warned for failure to comply with some aspect of the Terms of Service. The venue and/or submitted screenshot appears to contain unlicensed, copyrighted and/or trademarked content that may not be authorized by the rights holder. The venue is currently violating the Terms of Service through use of bots, campers, illegal gambling, or mainland Adult content. The submitted screenshot contains promotion text over the main image. The submitted description text includes lists of keywords and/or incoherent or inaccurate text. Newcomer friendly If you wish to be eligible for inclusion in the Newcomer Friendly Spots category of the Destination Guide, please consider whether your venue meets some of the following suggested guidelines: Is the landing point (and any immediate surrounding areas) optimized for new residents? For example, is it set correctly so arriving visitors land at the right spot? Also, do navigation tools like teleporters route people to the right place? If some of your key attractions are not in the immediate vicinity of the landing point, be sure to include clear signage or arrows that point visitors in the right direction. We recommend including calls-to-action for nearby activities and games so that newcomers can easily find fun things to do. Avoid use of "insider" language or instructions that may be confusing to someone accessing Second Life as a new Resident. Is the venue arrival experience free of unsolicited group invites, excessive notecards and other inventory offers? These notifications are confusing to many new Residents, who are unfamiliar with how groups and inventory work in Second Life. Consider how your venue design and its surroundings will be experienced by someone who is unfamiliar with Second Life. For example, do seats use one-click sit actions? Do other interactive objects, like vehicles, work? (We recommend that you test them using an alt account to make sure non-owners can use them, too.) Are there clear pointers to get further help with Second Life? For example, a scripted sign that links to Second Life Answers community help. Does the venue have an active and welcoming community within close proximity of the landing point? Editors' picks and popular places You can nominate venues for inclusion in the Editors' Picks or Popular Places categories on the Destination Guide Suggestion Page. Editors' Picks features venues that highlight some of the best architecture, activities, communities and/or creative efforts in Second Life. The features are refreshed periodically. Popular Places features venues frequently populated with real people, communities and conversations. This list is periodically refreshed but does not reflect real-time traffic and activity, nor does it aim to reflect the most popular places in Second Life. Every effort is made to include venues that adhere to Linden Lab’s policies on traffic bots and camping. Adult-rated areas Second Life’s Destination Guide aims to include a wide variety of communities and venues, including those in regions with Adult ratings. However, as a globally available service, Second Life is subject to many regional restrictions that prohibit advertising or promotion for some types of content and services, such as escorts and explicit content, including nudity. Because content listed in the Destination Guide can be seen by users of all ages and in all territories, no descriptions — regardless of rating — should contain explicit or overtly sexual language or imagery. Linden Lab’s guidelines for inclusion of adult-rated content in the Destination Guide aim to be consistent with the search-industry standards for advertising and search-engine promotion, as seen in these published guidelines by Google, Microsoft and Yahoo: Google AdWords Adult Content Guidelines Bing Ads/Microsoft Adult Content Guidelines Verizon Media Adult Content Guidelines As with all Destination Guide submissions, each entry is subject to review and editing by Linden Lab editorial staff. For more information on Second Life and Maturity Ratings, see Second Life Maturity Ratings page in the Knowledge Base and the Adult_Content_FAQ in the wiki. Submission guidelines You may suggest a destination using the form if: You personally own the parcel. You belong to the group that owns the parcel. You are on the access list of the Private Region that contains the parcel. The parcel belongs to Governor Linden and is set in ABOUT LAND > OPTIONS tab as a Hangout. The parcel belongs to a friend and is set in ABOUT LAND > OPTIONS tab as a Hangout. The parcel is 512m2 or larger. Suggested venues must comply with all of the following: Community Standards Trademark Guidelines Terms of Service DMCA policy Snapshot and machinima Policy Warning: Do not suggest content that is copyrighted or otherwise subject to another party's proprietary rights (including privacy, publicity, trademark, and trade secret rights) unless you own the rights or have the owner's permission. Content determined to infringe upon intellectual property rights is removed from our website and services. Residents are limited to two suggestions per month. You can also email the Destination Guide editors your suggestions. Please include a link to your image that meets the submission criteria below: Image specifications The quality and aesthetic composition of your image helps persuade Residents to visit your suggested inworld location, so submit a well-composed screenshot that captures the creativity, community and/or aesthetic beauty of your venue. Do not layer or embed any text or logos within the photo itself. You have an opportunity to add descriptive text separately in the Description field of the entry form. Focus on specific attractions you want visitors to see first. Specifically, if you're submitting an image for a store, generally emphasize your products rather than the store building. For example, if you make clothes, snapshot your avatar in a flattering pose wearing one of your dresses. Or if you have an attractive and creative vendor display, use that. If you've been selling in Second Life for awhile, you likely already have product photos as part of your branding that you can repurpose to save you time. However, an exception applies if your store is an attraction itself, like it's in a beautiful forest worth exploring. The Destination Guide submission form asks you to include a link to a web-hosted screenshot of your venue. Your image can be hosted on any photo-sharing or web-hosting site, such as Flickr or Photobucket. Use JPG format with the dimensions of 657 width by 394 height, in pixels. For example (see on Flickr? Be sure to include the full URL (ending in .jpg) to the web-hosted screenshot for your listing. Please note that the Destination Guide user suggestion form may reject images that do not meet this exact criteria. If you use Flickr to host your image, make sure to include the proper image URL (ending in .jpg) in the form. In some cases, Linden Lab editors may re-shoot images to improve visual clarity or composition, but we strongly prefer you submit quality images to begin with. Note: If you receive a form error when you try to submit your suggested destination, please email the Linden Lab editors. Include the submission suggestion and the info requested in the form (title, description, SLurl link) along with the image as an attachment. Inworld photography resources If you're unfamiliar with taking inworld photos, check out the following resources that offer tips and best practices: Guide to High-Quality Photography by Torley Linden. Taking high-res snapshots by Strawberry Singh. The Checklist is comprehensive photo shoot preparation, by Cajsa Lilliehook. Second Life Flickr Group includes many pictures from other Residents. And of course, look at existing Destination Guide submissions to see what your fellow Residents and the Linden Lab editors have done. Text specifications The submission form asks you for descriptive text of up to 400 typed characters. Destination Guide uses third-person voice, so avoid use of first-person language (such as I, we, our and my). Also, please refrain from using overly-hyped or promotion-heavy language; Destination Guide entries should be informative rather than overtly promotional in nature. Lists of keywords are not acceptable as descriptive text. Linden Lab reserves the right to edit material for length and clarity. Contact the Linden Lab editors For questions or update requests to existing entries, or to report an error — like a wrong SLurl or place that's gone — contact the Linden Lab editors via email. Please note that we are not able to respond to every inquiry, however we welcome all comments, feedback and suggestions.
  26. 2 points
    Finding land on which to rez objects Find the box in your inventory Open and unpack the box Wear or rez your purchased items Why does it tell me "Can't rez object..."? Unpacking a box on your avatar In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano 日本語 Português Русский Did you buy something from the SL Marketplace or inworld and wonder why you received a box? As in, "I bought a necklace but all I got was a picture of a necklace on a box?" Don't worry! Second Life items are sometimes sold in simple containers that require you to "open" them to get the contents. For example, if you purchase clothing that comes in a box, you must extract the clothing objects from the box container, then transfer them to your inventory so you can wear them. Don't wear the box. Remember, you have to open the box and use its contents. If you accidentally wear the box and it's attached to your avatar, simply right-click the box and choose Detach. Finding land on which to rez objects To open and unpack the box your purchase was delivered in, you need to be on land where you have permission to rez the box. If you're unsure if you have permission to do this where you are, just visit a sandbox where everyone has permission to rez objects. Click on a sandbox from this list, such as Sandbox Island. On the SLurl page that appears, click Teleport Now. A Place Information window appears in your Second Life Viewer. Click Teleport to travel to the sandbox you've chosen. Many stores also have a specially-sectioned "rez zone" inside, where autoreturn time is often set to a few minutes prevent litter from accumulating while giving you enough time to unpack. Find the box in your inventory Recently received items appear in the expandable Received items pane in the INVENTORY window. To access them, open your inventory and click the Received items bar to expand the pane and view your recently received items. You may click and drag these items into your main inventory or rez them by dragging them to the ground. Open and unpack the box Remember, you must be on land where you have permission to make your box appear by rezzing it. Once you have a place to rez your box, watch this video tutorial to see the steps below in motion: Drag the box from your inventory to the ground to rez it. Right-click the box and choose Open. A window opens. If the box has many contents, it can take a moment. Click Copy To Inventory to transfer the box's contents to your inventory. If the box contains an outfit you'd like to wear immediately, select Copy and Wear instead. Once the items are copied, they appear in your inventory as a folder with the box's name. If you don't see it, click the Recent tab. When you have finished unpacking your box, please remember to either Delete it or Take it back to your inventory to avoid cluttering up the area with boxes. Wear or rez your purchased items Your items are now in your inventory. Locate them and drag them inworld to rez them, or right-click and select Wear if they are clothing or other avatar attachments or components. Why does it tell me "Can't rez object..."? If you try to drag an object from your inventory to inworld and see this error: — it means building and dropping objects isn't allowed on the present parcel. How can you tell? Right-click the navigation bar and choose About Land. Hover over the cube with a universal "no" slashed circle to see "Building/dropping objects not allowed." Alternatively: Choose World menu > Place Profile > Place Profile. In the PLACES window, expand the Parcel section (if it isn't already open). This video shows the steps above: In some cases, if you're a member of the group that owns the land, activating your group title permits you to build despite the no-build icon which applies to the general public. Unpacking a box on your avatar Important: Only do this if you're comfortable dragging and dropping inventory items, or you may accidentally misplace important items. You can unpack a box if it's attached to your avatar. This may be useful if you're having a hard time getting to rezzable land, since you can always attach an object. However, this lacks the convenience of the Copy to Inventory and Copy and Wear buttons. In your inventory, right-click the box object and choose Attach To HUD or Attach To, then select an attachment point. Attach To HUD may be preferable because the box is attached to a point on your screen instead of your avatar and so is less likely to mess up your appearance. Alternatively, you can simply choose Wear, which attaches the box to its attachment point — if none has been specified by the creator, which is typically the case, it gets attached to your Right Hand. Right-click the attached box and choose Edit. In the build tools, click the Content tab. Drag each item from the object's contents to a folder in your inventory. You can also hold Shift or Ctrl to select multiple items. This doesn't work with "no copy" items in contents. Close the build tools.
  27. 2 points
    Managing your inventory Unassociated marketplace inventory Listed, unlisted, and unavailable status Editing a listing Removing a listing Changing the item associated with a listing Editing more than one listing at a time Viewing your Moderate or Adult listings Listing enhancements Managing your existing listing enhancements Listing enhancement reports Your store profile Revenue distributions Transaction history Problems with selling Redelivering an item to a customer Flagged items Email notification settings In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano 日本語 Português Managing your inventory The Manage inventory section of the Marketplace makes it easy to edit your item listings one at a time or in bulk. To manage your inventory: After logging in to the Marketplace, choose My Marketplace > Merchant home in the upper-right. Click Manage inventory on the left-hand side. Unassociated marketplace inventory If you have added an item to your Marketplace listings in the Second Life Viewer, but have not associated it with an existing listing or created a new listing, it appears in the Unassociated tab of the Marketplace listings window. For more information on adding an item to your Marketplace inventory and creating new listings, see Selling in the Marketplace. To associate an unassociated item with an existing listing: Right-click the unassociated item's folder in the Unassociated tab of the Marketplace listings window. Choose Associate listing. Enter the Listing ID of the existing listing. The listing ID can be found in parentheses next to a listed or unlisted item listing. For example, "Example Crate (3732)". The unassociated item now replaces the existing item in the listing. The previously listed item becomes unassociated inventory. Listed, unlisted, and unavailable status Each of your listings has a status: Listed - The normal, active status of an item that is publicly visible and available for purchase on the Marketplace. Exception: limited-quantity stock items stay Listed after they have sold out, but they cannot be purchased. Unlisted - An item that is intentionally hidden and unavailable for purchase. You might unlist a product because: You are permanently discontinuing the product but want to keep the listing for your personal records. The product is seasonal or event-specific and will be temporarily unlisted until the next time an appropriate event comes around. You've discovered serious bugs in your product and temporarily unlist it while you address the issue. Be sure to make an announcement on your Marketplace store (and anywhere else on the web you maintain a Marketplace presence, like a blog) to keep your customers informed. Unavailable - An item can be unavailable for various reasons: Freshly-added items with incomplete listings show up here. You need to Edit each one and fill in the required fields to List those items. Learn about item listing fields and how to use them. If an item violates the Marketplace Terms of Service, Linden Lab may make it unavailable. Note: The Date field in Manage inventory indicates the date the item was imported into the Second Life Marketplace. Editing a listing To edit one of your listings: In the upper-right, click My Marketplace > Merchant home. On the left-hand side, click Manage inventory. Click Actions > Edit next to the item you want to update. You can also click Actions > Preview to see how an item listing looks to potential customers, or click Actions > Unlist/List to activate or deactivate a listing. Make the desired changes to your item listing fields. Click Update to save your changes. You can also get to the Edit Item Listing page from the Second Life Viewer by right-clicking the item's folder and choosing Edit listing. Removing a listing To remove a listing, first unlist the item from the Second Life Marketplace: Login to the Marketplace and choose My Marketplace > My Store (upper-right). Click Manage inventory. Locate the item entry and click the Actions > Unlist link. Next, remove the listing from your Marketplace store: Login to the Marketplace and choose My Marketplace > My Store (upper-right). Click Manage inventory. Next to the item listing you want to remove, choose Actions > Delete. Changing the item associated with a listing If you want to sell a different or updated version of an item using a current listing: In the Second Life Viewer, choose Me > Marketplace listings Find the listing number in parentheses next to your existing listing. For example, "Example Crate (3757)". Click the Unassociated tab of the Marketplace listings window. Right-click an unassociated item you wish to associate with your listing and choose Associate listing. In the Associate Listing window that appears, enter the Listing ID of your existing listing and click OK. The unassociated item now replaces the existing item in the listing. The previously listed is moved to the Unassociated tab. Editing more than one listing at a time Note: Choosing Edit for multiple items is a useful way to standardize fields that are the same. For example, if you're selling colored variations of hair, most of the information will be identical; or you might have a standard blurb you want to add for multiple products. To edit more than one listing at a time: Click the checkboxes in the leftmost column for the items you want to edit, or click the checkbox at the top of the column to select them all. Tip: If you have a big inventory and want to view or select more items at once, change Items per page to a higher number, like 100. Below, next to Modify selected items, choose an option from the dropdown (List, Unlist, or Edit) and click Go. The page refreshes with a confirmation message. Viewing your Moderate or Adult listings When you search for your item on the Marketplace, make sure you select General, Moderate, or Adult as under Show maturity levels. Unless you enable Moderate and Adult content, the feature that lets shoppers exclude this content from their search results also prevents you from seeing your own listings. Your listing's maturity level may be automatically updated by the filters we use to scan for incorrectly rated listings. We occasionally update the filter keywords; if your listing contains words in the updated filter, its maturity rating will be changed accordingly. If you disagree with the automated maturity rating, please contact support. Listing enhancements Listing enhancements allow you to promote an item by advertising it as a "Featured Item" on a highly visible page. While editing an item listing, you can click the Add button on the right to: Feature this item on the home page - http://marketplace.secondlife.com Feature this item on a category landing page - For example, Avatar Accessories. Feature this item on the checkout receipt page - A shopper sees this page after checking out. Feature this item on the L$0 cart checkout ads page - A shopper sees this page after checking out with a L$0 balance (freebies). For listing enhancement prices, please see the Marketplace fees and commissions. Managing your existing listing enhancements To manage your listing enhancements: Go to the Marketplace. Click My Marketplace > Merchant home. Click Manage subscriptions on the left, or click Inventory tab > Manage subscriptions. The Subscriptions page shows the details of all your listing enhancements, including where each item is featured, its renewal period, and its current status. Find the listing enhancement you want to change. Click Edit on the right. You can now edit your listing enhancement. To cancel your listing enhancement at the end of the current time period, click Don't renew. To renew a listing enhancement that you have canceled, click Reactivate. To cancel your listing enhancement effective immediately, with no refund for time remaining, clickDelete. Important: Listing enhancements renew automatically! If you only want to advertise your item for a specific time period, follow the instructions for cancelling your listing enhancement. Listing enhancement reports You can view listing enhancement reports, which show statistics on impressions and click-throughs for each listing enhancement you have active: When logged into the Marketplace, click My Marketplace > Merchant home. On the left, click Listing enhancements (under Reports). Your store profile Your store has its own profile that can be customized. You should take advantage of this to promote your brand: Click My Marketplace in the upper-right and click Merchant Home. On the left-hand side, click Edit Store Information. Here's what the fields mean: Store Name - This defaults to your Resident name, but if you like you can change it to something else. Profile - Whatever you want to tell potential customers about you in up to 2,100 characters, like who you are, what you sell, and why you do it. Examples: "We've been selling in Second Life for seven years and these are some testimonials from thousands of delighted customers!"; "We believe every avatar should be able to have an incredibly beautiful home"; or "Our company's goal is to amplify your awesome." Policies - Do you accept refunds? Do you prefer to be contacted via email or IM, or have you hired support staff that your customers should contact? Make sure to state this here so customers' expectations are clear. Link to Blog - Link to your blog or another website about your store. Many sellers use blogs to announce product updates. Some even group together and form community blogs, like iheartsl. Link to Inworld Store - If you have an inworld store, enter its SLurl here. Store Image - Click Browse to choose a JPG, PNG, or GIF image from your hard drive. A well-compressed JPG generally works best. This isn't usually a picture of your inworld store but rather of your brand's logo. This small image must be exactly 45x45 pixels, so make sure what you upload is legible. There are web tools like Picnik that can help. Store Banner Image - Again, click Browseto choose a JPG, PNG, or GIF image from your hard drive. Must be exactly 700x100 pixels. Your Store Name and Store Image appear on the right-hand side of all your item pages, like this: Tip: If you've gotten this far and you haven't read How to market your products yet, you should! Revenue distributions The revenue distributions feature allows payments to be automatically distributed among multiple Residents. Distributions are based on percentages, not fixed dollar amounts. For example, say you are selling a car for L$1,000. You make L$700 per each car sold and distribute L$200 per sale to Alice and L$100 per sale to Bob. In this distribution, 20% goes to Alice and 10% goes to Bob. Control revenue distributions by clicking Add Distribution on the Edit item listing page. Transaction history To view your Transaction History: Login to the Marketplace. Click My Marketplace and click Merchant Home. On the left, under Reports, click Orders. On the Orders page, specify a Start Date and End Date by clicking the calendar dropdowns. Click Go to refresh the page. On the right, click Download CSV to download a CSV file that can be read in various applications, like Microsoft Excel. If a Resident buys an item as a gift for someone else, the recipient's name shows under Recipient. If the item is intended to be received by the same Resident who bought it, you see the buyer's name next to Customer. Problems with selling Having problems while selling your items? If you can't find a solution below, you can get more help at theSupport Portal. Redelivering an item to a customer If a customer requests that an item be redelivered — perhaps they didn't receive it, or lost their only copy — you can follow these steps: When logged into the Marketplace, click My Marketplace > Merchant home in the upper right. On the left-hand side, click Orders. Search for the order by Order # or Customer (the Resident's name). Click View order or the order number you want to redeliver. Click Redeliver item. Tip: You might want to make sure that your customer is online before redelivering. If a Resident has more than 25 offline message notifications, any new IMs or item deliveries will fail. Also, if the Resident is set to Away, redeliveries from the Marketplace will fail. Flagged items Flagged items are not removed automatically, and flagging does not affect search relevance. If an item is flagged, the item goes into a queue. Based on the flagger's rating, the flagged item will move up or down in the queue. People who abuse flagging will be ignored. If your item was flagged for: An incorrect category (the most common reason for flagging): See if there are sub-categories of the section where your item is currently listed and move your item to a more appropriate section. Do not post items in the "root" categories such as Apparel, Home & Garden, etc. unless you absolutely cannot find a sub-category that applies. You might also suggest a new Marketplace category. An incorrect maturity level: Please check the maturity level of your item. If you still have questions about why your item was flagged or unlisted, please open a support case and include the exact name of the product as it appears on your inventory page. Email notification settings You can change the types of email notifications you receive from the Second Life Marketplace: Visit http://marketplace.secondlife.com. If you are not already signed in, click Sign in in the top right corner of the page. Click My Marketplace at the top of the page, then select My account from the dropdown menu. Click Email settings on the left side of the My account page. On the Email settings page, under Merchant Notifications, click On or Off next to each type of email notification to set your notification preference. As a merchant on the Second Life Marketplace, you may receive the following types of email notifications: Purchase notification Note: This email is sent after delivery and payments have both been completed on a line item. Redelivery notification Note: This email is sent when either you or Linden Lab customer support redelivers an item. Review alert Flag alert
  28. 2 points
    Estates versus Private Regions Private Regions overview Additional types of Private Regions Homestead Regions Homesteads for educators and non-profits Land parcels on Homestead Regions Openspace Regions Buying Private Regions Land parcels on your regions Transferring or canceling Private Region ownership Estates overview Transferring or canceling an estate Additional features and controls for Private Regions and Estates Purchasing from the land store Delivery Maturity ratings Guidelines for naming Private Regions Ordering adjacent regions Private Region customizations Initial customizations Customizations after purchase Renting a region for a special event Rental rate Details More information Invoicing for special orders Where to get an invoice Verification information Approval and Private Region delivery Payment Information Converting Regions Tip: To find out who owns a particular region, select World > Place Profile > Region/Estate > Covenant and locate the listing for Owner. If the owner is listed as (none), the region is owned by Linden Lab. Estates versus Private Regions An estate is a term for a group of one or more Private Regions that belong to one Resident. Each square on the map is a region. A Resident can own many estates. An estate can never have less than one region. Regions owned by different Residents cannot be in the same estate. Regions in the same estate share certain common settings, including but not limited to: Ban lists Sun settings Estate managers There are a few other differences: There is no charge to change an estate name, but there is a nominal charge to change a Private Region name. You can request transfer of ownership of regions, but not entire estates. Private Regions overview Private Regions are regions in Second Life that are explicitly paid for and controlled by a Resident. In general, Private Region ownership is an excellent choice for Residents who: Wish to enjoy land ownership separate from the ever-changing Second Life mainland. Want to build and control a Second Life experience with or without adjacent neighbors. Require more land controls than those provided on the mainland. Want to name the region their land is in (within the naming guidelines). Additional types of Private Regions In addition to standard Private Regions, existing region owners may purchase Homestead Regions. Homesteads are less expensive than standard Private Regions but are designed for lighter use and can support fewer objects and avatars than a normal region. You may also choose to convert one or more of your Private Regions into multiple Openspaces or Homesteads, or you may choose to convert some of your Openspaces or Homesteads to different region types. After any conversion, you must always have at least one standard Private Region remaining. For full details on converting between different region types, see Converting Private Regions. Homestead Regions A Homestead is a type of Private Region intended for such purposes as: Low-density rentals Light commercial use Quiet residential use Other specifications for Homesteads include: Available to full region owners only Lower price than a full region Events and classifieds are permitted Comes with lower usage limits than full regions: Land capacity set at 5000 Concurrent avatar limit set at 20 Pricing for Homesteads is as follows: Setup fee of $149 Monthly fee of $109 Homesteads for educators and non-profits We do not offer discounts on any type of Private Regions, but qualified educators and non-profits are allowed to order a Homestead Region without owning a standard Private Region, unlike regular Residents. If you represent a qualified non-profit organization that wants to order a Homestead Region, submit a support case to do so. Land parcels on Homestead Regions Homesteads are approved for rental use within the Region limitations we have set. Openspace Regions Openspace Regions are a type of Private Region intended for light use such as water, hills, or forest. They are not intended for building, home rentals, or events. To own an Openspace Region, you must also own a normal Private Region. Openspace specifications include: Available to full region owners only Lower price than a full region or Homestead Events and classifieds are not permitted Comes with lower usage limits than full regions or Homesteads: Land capacity set at 1000 Concurrent avatar limit set at 10 Pricing for Openspaces is as follows: New Openspace regions are no longer available for sale. Monthly fee of $60 For more information about Openspace Regions, see the article titled Openspace Regions. Buying Private Regions Land parcels on your regions Parcels can be sold to other Residents, but you remain responsible for the monthly payments. You can make arrangements for these new parcel owners to pay you for use of the estate, but that's between you and the other Residents. Many estate owners use the estate's covenant to explain their payment structure. Estate owners can deed out the land parcels on regions in their estate to a group. The actual ownership is not conveyed to the group (you still own the regions), and group members cannot pay for your regions by contributing land allocations. The region owner (you) are always billed the region's monthly payment, no matter how the group land is set up. Read more about estates and groups in Group-owned land. Transferring or canceling Private Region ownership You have a couple of options: You may transfer ownership of the Private Region to another Resident. This requires both you and the buyer to enter support tickets with certain details about the transaction. See Managing Private Regions for more details on the transfer process, cost, and timeframe. You may abandon your Private Region to Linden Lab. There is no fee to do so. No refunds will be given, and you will have the use of your region until the end of the current billing cycle. You need to notify the Concierge staff of your intention by submitting a ticket. Go to the Support Portal and click New Ticket Submission. In the Ticket Type dropdown, select Land and Region Issues. In the Region Request dropdown, select Region Cancellation Request. Fill out the requested details, and at the bottom, click Finish to submit the ticket. You can see billing dates and fees for all of your Private Regions at the Land Portal. If your Private Region fees are invoiced, you can see the date your billing cycle ends by logging into your Netsuite account. Note: If your next billing date falls within 5 business days of when you submit the ticket, please notify Concierge by phone or chat, so that you will not be billed automatically. Provide your ticket number in that conversation. When your ticket is processed, you'll receive a response indicating that the region will be taken offline on its next billing date and that you will not be charged any further maintenance fees. Please pick up or return any content on the region; any inventory remaining after the billing date will be deleted. Estates overview An estate is a named collection of one or more Private Regions. Estate-level controls allow you to administer and make adjustments to all regions in a given estate. Since all Private Regions must be in an estate, all Private Region owners are also estate owners by default, even if you only have one Private Region. Estate owners can: Acquire a large amount of land easily. Enjoy land ownership separate from the ever-changing Second Life mainland. Build and control their Second Life experience without adjacent neighbors. Exercise more land controls than those provided on the mainland. Name the regions they own. Estate-level tools make it convenient to manage multiple regions. If you have three regions (A, B and C) in an estate called Z, then to get to each of them you still need to teleport to those regions by name. You can however ban someone from the Z estate, which keeps that person from accessing any of Z's regions. You can also set the day/night cycle by estate so that all of your regions are in sync. Transferring or canceling an estate It is possible to transfer an estate by transferring all Private Regions in the estate to another Resident. For details on transferring Private Regions, see the Managing Private Regions. If you would like to terminate ownership of an estate without transferring it, please submit a support case of the type Land & Region > Region Cancellation Request, with all the relevant fields completed. Additional features and controls for Private Regions and Estates Estate owners possess a broad array of powers and options for maintaining their Private Regions and shaping them to fit their desired appearance. Many of these options can be found in the Second Life Viewer's Region/Estate window. For a more exhaustive list of management options such as region rollbacks, covenants, and terraforming tools, see Managing Private Regions. Private Region types Undeveloped regions are delivered completely empty of objects and ready to be built and shaped to your liking. Themed regions contain a ready-made build which has been optimized to get you started on your new land in minutes, and which can be futher modified to your liking. All themes are available as Full Regions, and most as Homestead Regions. The table below explains the different types of Private Regions available for purchase in the Second Life® virtual world. Full Regions Homestead Regions Openspace Regions Description The premier region product which offers the highest performance. Lower performance than a Full Region and intended for low-density rentals, quiet residential, or light commercial use. Available only to Residents who own at least one Full Region. Intended for very low-impact scenic use such as ocean, forest, or countryside. No longer available for sale. Size 65,536 m2 65,536 m2 65,536 m2 Setup fee US$349 Undeveloped US$629 Developed US$149 Undeveloped US$250 Developed No longer available for sale. Monthly maintenance US$229 US$109 US$60 Land capacity 20,000 5,000 1000 Max. avatars 100 20 10 Script limits N/A TBD TBD Habitation allowed? Yes Yes No Rental allowed? Yes Yes No Events & classifieds? Yes Yes No Conversion to Full Region allowed? N/A Yes Yes Purchasing from the land store Note: To purchase land from the Land Store, you must have billing information on file. Add billing information on your billing information page. Log into the Second Life Land Portal. Tip: Read the introduction explaining the difference between developed land and undeveloped land. The former is great for a quick start, while the latter is the choice if you want to create everything from scratch. Click either Buy an Undeveloped Private Region or Buy a Themed Private Region. If you don't need the amount of control and space that comes with a region, you can choose to Buy Mainland. You are presented with thumbnail images and descriptions of several appealing choices. These are all starting points for your creative vision, and you can always reshape your land later. Click Continue to proceed. Use the comparison details on the "Land Detail" page to decide whether you want a Full Region or Homestead. Click Choose under your selection to continue. Note: You can only purchase a Homestead region if you own or are also going to buy one or more full regions. EXCEPTION: Educational institutions. See Information for educators. On the "Name your land" page, type a name in the Create a Region Name field and click Check Availability. If your selected name is not taken, you can proceed. Region Coordinates are automatically filled in; these coordinates are where your Region will be physically located on the World Map. If you'd prefer to override them, click [change], then click a map square that isn't crossed out in red. You can click the arrow buttons to look at different areas on the map. You can also search for another region to be near (for example, one that a friend or colleague owns). Take a few seconds to fill out the brief survey at the bottom. Click the Add to Cart button. Once all details have been successfully verified, you can shop for more regions (same steps as above) or click Proceed to Checkout. Note: You may have up to 10 items in your cart at once. Items don't stay in your cart forever; they stay in your cart until you or someone else buys them. A region is held as yours for 30 minutes after your last activity in the Land Store. If someone else buys it (or a neighboring region) after those 30 minutes have elapsed, it will appear in your cart as unavailable. On the "Real Estate: Shopping Cart" page, click Place Order to confirm your purchase. Note: Orders totaling more than US$10,000 can't be processed through the Land Store. If you're planning on buying more than US$10,000 worth of land, consider making multiple orders. Delivery Once your region purchase is complete, you receive an email with the details. A new region is generally delivered within 15 minutes. Occasional service updates may affect that time, so see the Second Life Grid Status Reports page if it's taking longer than expected. Maturity ratings New regions are delivered with a default maturity rating of Moderate. You can customize this using the Region/Estate tools: From the Viewer menus, go to World > Place Profile > Region/Estate. Click the Region tab. From the Rating dropdown, select either or Adult. Click Apply. Note: If your region is Moderate or Adult, only Residents, including yourself, who have set their maturity preference correctly will be able to access the region. Otherwise, if they try to enter, they'll be prompted either to set their preferences or be age-verified. See Maturity ratings for more information. Guidelines for naming Private Regions Follow these guidelines when naming your Private Region (island) or estate. Private Region or estate names: Must not already be in use. Must be more than 2, but less than 26 characters (spaces count). Must contain three words or less. Must use only alphanumeric characters (no punctuation). Must not be the name of a real life city (however "New York Island" or "Los Angeles City" are fine). Cannot include SL, Linden, Linden Lab, Second Life etc in the name. Must comply with General maturity rating guidelines. Do not use the following as a Private Region name or estate name: The name of another person to the extent that it may cause deception or confusion. A name which violates any trademark right, copyright, or other proprietary right. A name which may mislead other users to believe you to be an employee of Linden Lab. A name which Linden Lab deems in its discretion to be vulgar or otherwise offensive (obscenities in any language and however spelled; language that is racist, sexist or otherwise derogatory in nature). Linden Lab reserves the right to change Private Region and estate names as we see fit. Ordering adjacent regions It is possible for two people to order adjacent Private Regions. The first person must: Order a Private Region, then log into the Second Life website and click the Land Manager tab. Click the My Regions tab. Click the estate name of the estate for which you want to allow neighbors. In the Allowed Neighbors column, click the edit link for a specific region. Type the name of the Resident you want to allow as a neighbor, then click Add. Click Close. The second person must Order a Private Region as described in Purchasing from the land store. During the ordering process, you may place your new region adjacent to the first person's region. Private Region customizations Initial customizations With your region order, you can specify the following customizations: Name: You can select a unique name when creating the region. See the Guidelines for Private Region Naming for details. Terrain shape: You can select from one of the six predesigned templates (including flat green land and open water). Estate: You can assign your region to its own estate or to an estate you already own (with other Private Regions owned by you). Your Estate tools allow you to control settings for more than one region at once. Customizations after purchase As estate owner, you have access to the Region/Estate menu (under World > Place Profile). This provides you with several other options to customize your region: Water height: You may specify the height sea level reaches on your region. Terrain textures: You can use almost any texture for terrain. You can specify low-resolution textures as well as high-resolution textures and configure the elevation range at which they shift from one to another. There's more information on terrain textures in the Estate Tools article. Fixed sun position: You can lock the sun at a specific time of day or night. Terraform: You can lower or raise your terrain 100m from the height at which it was created. This is usually sufficient for nearly any type of terrain (including very dramatic cliffs). Custom terrain files: You can save your terrain to a .RAW image file, edit it in a program such as Photoshop, and upload it back into Second Life to make wide-sweeping changes to your Region's terrain instantly. Agent limit: You may control how many avatars can visit your Regon at the same time, anywhere from one to over one hundred. Parcel activity: You can decide whether to allow renters to sell their parcels to other Residents, and whether they can subdivide the parcels they rent. Teleport routing: You can use a telehub to force Residents to land at a specific location in your region, or you can allow direct teleporting so Residents can use landmarks or the world map teleport wherever they like. Access: You can close your Private Region to everyone except your friends and colleagues, or you can open it to everyone in Second Life! You may also ban specific Residents by name if they cause trouble. Renting a region for a special event Got a plan for a large event and need a temporary place to have it? Linden Lab offers temporary Full Region rentals. Rental amounts are to be paid in full at the beginning of the rental period. Rental rate Land rental rates are different depending on whether you want to rent Private Regions or space on the mainland. Private Regions are US$50 per region per day. Mainland regions are L$4,000 per region per day. Note: You must have a premium account to rent mainland regions. You can rent a Private Region with any account type. Linden Lab does not offer discounts on region rentals at this time. Mainland rental regions are Iridium, Osmium, Palladium, Platinum, Rhodium, and Ruthenium (named after the platinum group metals.) Details Reservations must be made 2 weeks in advance and are on a first-come first-served basis. Residents must include a full description of the event when applying. Minimal rental period is 3 days. Residents are allowed to terraform the land and do not incur tier fees for temporary ownership of the land. Residents cannot transfer the land during the rental period. The original state of the regions will be saved immediately before the rental period. At the conclusion of the rental period, the regions will be restored. More information If you're interested in renting, please submit a Land and Region Issues ticket with the Region Request field set to Region Rental from our Support page. Additional information you'll need to submit includes: The number of regions you want Rental start and end dates Whether or not you need to be able to terraform the regions A full description of your event Invoicing for special orders If you are an educator, non-profits organization, Resident under 18 years old or a business entities that requires a formal invoice, then place your order for private regions with the Special Island Order Form. Use the special order form under these conditions: Orders for eligible educational institution or not-for-profit. There is no longer an educational discount, however, your status as an educator or non-profit does require verification, and there is a minimum initial purchase of five regions to qualify for invoicing. The five region minimum purchase requirement does not apply to currently-invoiced customers. For all under 18 Resident, non-Linden Home, land orders (requires parental/guardian approval if under 18). Note: users under the age of 18 cannot purchase Linden Homes. Any order requiring an invoice (payments by wire transfer, check or credit card). Specifically for business entities purchasing more than five regions (minimum requirement does not apply to currently invoiced customers) requiring a formal invoice/receipt or PO# type process. PO# not required at the time of ordering. If your purchase does not fall into these categories, then place your order at the Land Store. Note: All orders placed through the Special Island Order Form require advance payment of six or twelve months maintenance fees. Maintenance fees are added to your island order invoice based on the payment cycle chosen at a rate of $229.00. Payment is made from the invoice which is issued upon the delivery of your island. Your first invoice will include both the setup and the first cycle of maintenance. Where to get an invoice Second Life offers the invoicing option though the special orders selection in the Land Store. You can also access invoicing directly from specialorders.secondlife.com. Verification information You need to provide the following information to use the invoicing option. Please read the guidelines below carefully. If your questions are not answered by this document, please submit a Support ticket to request explanation (include "Education" in the ticket summary). Note: Second Life cannot provide invoicing option to Individuals, including educational professionals who wish to purchase a region for personal use or developers who wish to purchase a region for an institution. Approval and Private Region delivery Submitting an order does not obligate you to pay immediately; payment is made once the Private Region has been delivered and the invoice sent. When you place the order, you receive a sales order confirmation. This is merely an order confirmation, not a notice of delivery. Once you place the order, your order enters the approval queue. Once the order is approved, you receive an approval email and your order is placed in the delivery queue. After approval, delivery time under normal circumstances is 10-15 business days. You cannot make a payment until you receive an invoice, which you then have 30 days to pay. Invoices for maintenance are emailed when the payment schedule is ready for renewal. Warning: Late payment may result in the closure of your Private Region and the loss of any inventory it contains. You have access to your account in Netsuite (Second Life's special orders system) through the special ordering website. Note: Netsuite is a different website than secondlife.com. In your Netsuite account, you will be able to: View your sales order. Add your credit card information. Pay your invoice with a credit card. Payment Information You may pay via check, credit card or wire transfer. We neither accept Paypal nor use funds from your Second Life account to pay for your invoiced Private Region order. Note: Currently, VAT is not added to our invoiced orders, but we will inform you if this changes. Find out more about VAT and Second Life in Account balance. Wire Transfer See Account balance for more information on paying by wire transfer. You must pay your bank's wiring charges, which are added to your invoice total. Be sure to reference your invoice number in the wire details. Credit Card To pay by credit card: Log into your Netsuite account. You are directed to menu options. Select Make a Payment. All outstanding invoices appear. Move to the bottom of the page, where you may add your credit card information for payment of the invoices you select. Note: The list of outstanding invoices is not the sales order document. Check or Bank Draft Please submit a check or bank draft to: Linden Research Inc Dept. 34109 PO Box 39000 San Francisco CA 94111 USA Those who use Purchase Order numbers should send us the required vendor forms for completion. We will add the PO# to the invoice as soon as we receive it. Other useful information: Federal Tax ID#: 94-3364615 VAT #: EU826011179 You may choose to convert some of your Private Regions from one Private Region type to another. This article covers the different scenarios and costs associated with each possible conversion. Converting Regions For information on converting your Regions, please see our article on Converting Private Regions.
  29. 2 points
    Movement View Communicate System General For advanced users Shortcut keys differ between PC (Windows and Linux) and Mac not just in Second Life, but across applications in general. PC shortcuts are indicated in the tables below. For your convenience, here's a table showing how modifier keys for keyboard shortcuts translate between platforms: PC Mac Ctrl Cmd ⌘ Alt Opt ⌥ Shift Shift Right-click Right-click (Ctrl-click with a single-button mouse) Movement Walk forward W or ↑ Walk backward S or ↓ Turn left A or ← Turn right D or → Run Double-tap W or ↑ (forward); S or ↓ (backward) Always run Ctrl+R Jump E or PgUp (Tap once) Toggle flying F or Home Fly up Hold E or hold PgUp Fly down Hold C or hold PgDn View Mouselook M Reset View Esc Look at Hold Alt and click mouse to re-center Zoom in Ctrl+0 Zoom default Ctrl+9 Zoom out Ctrl+8 Zoom camera in Alt+↑ Zoom camera out Alt+↓ Orbit up Alt+Ctrl+↑ Orbit down Alt+Ctrl+↓ Orbit left Alt+Ctrl+← Orbit right Alt+Ctrl+→ Pan up Alt+Ctrl+Shift+↑ Pan down Alt+Ctrl+Shift+↓ Pan left Alt+Ctrl+Shift+← Pan right Alt+Ctrl+Shift+→ Communicate Friends Ctrl+ Shift+F Local chat history Ctrl+H Look at last speaker Ctrl+\ Gestures Ctrl+G Previous message entered* Ctrl + ↑ Next message entered* Ctrl + ↓ *Available in Nearby Chat, Group Chat, and Instant Message windows. System Undo Ctrl+Z Redo Ctrl+Y Cut Ctrl+X Paste Ctrl+V Duplicate Ctrl+D Select all Ctrl+A Deselect Ctrl+E Close window Ctrl+W Close all windows Ctrl+ Shift+W General Preferences Ctrl+P Help F1 Search Ctrl+F World Map Ctrl+M Mini-map Ctrl+ Shift+M Teleport home Ctrl+ Shift+H Inventory Ctrl+I Build Ctrl+B Upload image Ctrl+U Take snapshot Ctrl+ Shift+S Quit Second Life Ctrl+Q For advanced users It is possible to remap the Second Life Viewer's keyboard controls, but be aware that the procedure is risky and can compromise the Viewer's functionality. To learn more, read our wiki article on Keyboard mapping.
  30. 2 points
    What to do if you forget your password What to do if you forget your Second Life username Retrieve your name from your welcome email Retrieve your name from the Second Life website How to change your password How to change your email address What to do if your account is compromised What to do if you forget your password If you know your username but have forgotten your password, go to the password recovery page. Enter your username and click Send Instructions to have instructions on how to create a new password sent to the email address connected to the account . You'll need to answer the security question you chose when creating your Second Life account. Be sure to check your junk mail/spam folder. If you can't recall the answer to your security question or no longer have access to the e-mail account you provided, just contact Customer Support, preferably by opening a support case. You'll be asked to verify your identity and, working together, we can reset your security question. We apologize in advance that support cannot retrieve passwords. Luckily, this won't be an issue once we reset your security question. What to do if you forget your Second Life username The username you created during registration is required to login to the Second Life® virtual world. If you forget your username, you can retrieve it: From your welcome email From the Second Life website Note: If you forgot which email address you used when you registered, you can find out on the Contact Information page. You must have either your username or email address to recover your account credentials. Retrieve your name from your welcome email You provided an email address to register your account. A welcome email containing the Second Life username you created was sent to this address. To locate the email: Log into your email account and search your archives for "second life". Look for an email with your username in the subject line: "Welcome to Second Life, YOUR NAME!" Retrieve your name from the Second Life website Warning: If you registered multiple Second Life accounts with the same email address, you will be able to retrieve the username of only your first account. This is a known system limitation. Before you ever have to use this form, write down your usernames somewhere you'll remember! If you have forgotten your username or password: Click Login on the Second Life website. Click Forgot your login information? Under Forgot Your Name? enter your email address. Click Forgot Account Name. Your Second Life name will be sent to you shortly. How to change your password You can change your password, along with other account-related information, on your account page. To view your account page, log in and select Account > Account Summary from the top left side of the page. Click Account > Change Password to change your password. Your Second Life account is linked with an email address of your choosing, which is where things like announcements from Linden Lab and offline instant messages (if you have those enabled) are delivered. How to change your email address You can easily change your email address on the Second Life website: Login to your Dashboard. On the left, click Account, then click Change Email Settings. Enter a new email address after Enter your new email address. Confirm your new email address by entering it again after Confirm your new email address. Click Save Changes under Confirm your new email address. Shortly afterwards, your old email address will also receive a "Second Life Email Changed" email to confirm that the change was done by you, the actual account holder. Tip: Keep your account safe! Don't give your password out, and make sure your web browser's address bar shows secondlife.com to prevent being phished. What to do if your account is compromised Your account may have been compromised if: You can't access your account. You suddenly notice a reduced available balance on the payment source you have on file. If this happens, contact us immediately! Here's what to do: Go to the Second Life Help page and log in if you can. If you can't access your account, use the Forgot your login information? link on the right to recover your username and reset your password. Then log in. On the Second Life Help page page, click Submit a a Support Case. Under Issue Type, select Account Issue. A second dropdown appears. Under Account Issue, select Account Compromised. Fill in the rest of the fields as directed. Click Submit. Check your email for your case number. Call our fraud number: 800-860-6990. Once you do this, Linden Lab will place your account on hold and investigate the relevant transactions. This may take a few days. Once we have concluded the investigation, we'll send you an email explaining our conclusion and the action we will take. Note that all transactions involving Linden dollars are subject to Linden Lab's Terms of Service. Tip: Even if you are able to log into your account, we recommend that you change your password immediately to something secure and unique. Changing your password regularly is one good way to protect the safety of your account. For information on how to change your password, see the How to change your password section of this article.
  31. 2 points
    En otros idiomas Cómo cambiar las preferencias para poder ver contenido adulto Cómo aportar la información de pago El terreno y otros contenidos de Second Life pueden tener la calificación General, Moderado, o Adulto. De forma predeterminada, los residentes nuevos de 18 o más años de edad tienen acceso a los contenidos calificados como General y Moderado, y los de 16 o 17 años solo pueden acceder a los contenidos de calificación General. Consulta Calificación de contenidos para obtener más información acerca del sistema de calificación de Second Life. Si tienes 18 años de edad o más, para tener acceso al contenido adulto debes activarlo en tus preferencias del visor. Cómo cambiar las preferencias para poder ver contenido adulto Aunque tengas 18 o más años de edad, es posible que de todos modos tengas que activar el contenido adulto. Además, tienes que utilizar la versión del visor 1.23 o posterior para tener acceso a las preferencias de calificación. Descarga la última versión del visor. Sugerencia: Puedes comprobar la versión de tu visor en la parte superior, seleccionando Ayuda > Acerca de Second Life . Inicia sesión en Second Life y sigue estos pasos en el visor para configurar tus preferencias de calificación: Selecciona Yo > Preferencias (o pulsa Ctrl-P) y pulsa en la pestaña General . Elige General, Moderado, Adulto en el menú desplegable Quiero acceder a contenido calificado: Pulsa OK. ¡Felicidades! Ya puedes visitar cualquier terreno accesible al público de Second Life, con independencia de su calificación. Nota: Si tus preferencias no están configuradas para permitir contenido adulto e intentas ingresar a una parcela o región calificada para adultos, recibirás un mensaje que te permitirá cancelar la teleportación o actualizar inmediatamente tus preferencias de acceso a General, Moderado, Adulto. Aportar la información de pago Los propietarios de terrenos también pueden restringir el acceso su terreno a aquellos residentes que hayan aportado su información de pago a Linden Lab. Si has comprado dólares Linden (L$) o algún artículo en el mercado, ya has aportado tu información de pago. Si todavía no has registrado la información de pago o si no estás seguro de haberlo hecho: Inicia sesión en la página de tu Cuenta en el sitio web de Second Life. Selecciona Información de facturación en la sección Cuenta de la parte izquierda de la página. Pulsa en Añadir tarjeta de crédito, Añadir cuenta PayPal, o Añadir cuenta Skrill. Especifica un número de tarjeta de crédito, una cuenta Skrill o una cuenta de PayPal verificada. Establecer una relación de pago con Linden Lab no constituye una compra; no tienes que pagar nada por facilitarnos la información de pago. Nota: Linden Lab solamente acepta los pagos de PayPal si proceden de cuentas de PayPal verificadas. Consulta la página de resumen general de la cuenta de PayPal o examina la documentación de soporte para asegurarte de que dispones de una cuenta verificada.
  32. 2 points
    Registration May I browse listings without registering for Second Life? How do I register for Second Life? Second Life Auctions and "My Account" Can anyone in Second Life buy land in the auctions? Does the land I win in auction count against my land allocation? Can I bid on land if it would put me in a higher land tier? Can I bid with L$ that I don't have? Bidding How do I bid? How do I increase my bid? Why doesn't my bid show up online after I bid? How will I know if my bid is no longer winning? How will I know if I win? How can I view all bids I've submitted? Why did a bid from earlier today beat my bid? Can I submit a bid offline? What if an auction ends with no bids? Collecting Your New Land How will I know when I can take possession of the land? How do I take possession? Is it possible to avoid tiering up by releasing other land before confirming a new higher tier? Resolving Auction Problems What if I bid in an auction and realize I have made a mistake? Who do I contact if I have a problem? In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano 日本語 Português For a walkthrough of the auctions feature, see Land auctions. Registration May I browse listings without registering for Second Life? You may browse as much as you'd like without signing up for Second Life. In order to bid on an auction, you will need to have an active Premium Second Life account with verified billing information and a verified email address. Please login to Your Account on the Second Life website to verify your email address and upgrade your account to a Premium account today! How do I register for Second Life? Visit Join Second Life to register for a Second Life account; basic account creation is free, so you can explore land before you upgrade. Second Life Auctions and "My Account" Can anyone in Second Life buy land in the auctions? No. Only residents that have Premium memberships are eligible to participate in auctions. Your account must also have a Verified email address and a Linden dollar (L$) balance sufficient to make a bid. Does the land I win in auction count against my land allocation? Yes. Before you bid, be sure you are comfortable with paying any additional monthly fee ("tiering up") that might be triggered. You can review your land allotment by viewing Your Second Life Account. Can I bid on land if it would put me in a higher land tier? Yes. You are automatically assigned to the tier (possibly increasing your monthly billing amount) when you win. The auction will inform you if winning the auction will modify your tier requirement (but note that each auction evaluates this independently; if you are bidding in multiple auctions, they will not take that into account). Can I bid with L$ that I don't have? No. You must have the Linden dollars available in your account at the time of bidding, because if you submit a new high bid, your maximum bid amount is held in escrow until you are either outbid or you win the auction. Bidding How do I bid? After you review the listing information for the item that interests you, click Bid on This Property. Enter your maximum bid, and then click Confirm. How do I increase my bid? To increase your bid, go to My Auction Activity and choose the bid you want to increase. You can only increase your bid if you are not currently the leading bidder. Can I decrease my maximum bid? Once you have bid, you cannot decrease your bid amount. The only way to exit an auction where you are the leading bid is for someone to outbid you. Why doesn't my bid show up online after I bid? My Auction Activity should show your bid as soon as it is entered. If it doesn't appear, you may be viewing an old version of the page. Try clicking your browser's Refresh or Reload buttons. How will I know if my bid is no longer winning? We send you an email and return your escrowed funds when you are outbid. However, there can be unpredictable delays in email transmission. We suggest that you regularly visit our website to check your bidding activity on the My Auction Activity page. How will I know if I win? We will notify you by email if you win. How can I view all bids I've submitted? Go to My Auction Activity page and use the filter to find your previous bids. Why did a bid from earlier today beat my bid? If your maximum bid is for exactly the same amount as some earlier bidder's maximum, the earlier bidder wins (if their maximum is higher, their bid will be increased to your maximum plus the bid increment). Can I submit a bid offline? No. Only online bids can be made. What if an auction ends with no bids? If an auction ends with no bids, the original owner retains ownership of the parcel and is responsible for any tier fees owed on it. Collecting Your New Land How will I know when I can take possession of the land? Ownership of the parcel should be set to the winner within an hour after the end of the auction. If there is a problem with the ownership, contact Customer Support. How do I take possession? The parcel is assigned to you inworld once the auction ends. Is it possible to avoid tiering up by releasing other land before confirming a new higher tier? To avoid the possibility of higher tier charges, reduce your land use prior to participating in an auction. Land won in auction is delivered to the winning account and affects peak land use immediately. Resolving Auction Problems What if I bid in an auction and realize I have made a mistake? Please bid carefully. All bids are final and cannot be cancelled. The only way you can leave an active auction where you have bid is if you are outbid. Who do I contact if I have a problem? You should file a ticket through the Support Portal at Second Life Help.
  33. 2 points
    Avatar types Which clothing fits which avatar types? Determining your avatar type General tips: Try on a piece of classic avatar clothing and see if it appears correctly Information for merchants How to label your clothing for sale Marketplace instructions Why create a brand to support clothing fit for your custom avatar? Example situations for clothing merchants In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Português Italiano 日本語 As Second Life has evolved, so have the avatars that inhabit the Second Life world. With the introduction of fitted mesh technology for avatars, it has become more complicated to determine whether or not a piece of clothing will display properly on your own avatar. This article will help you to determine whether your avatar is a Classic avatar, Standard mesh avatar, or a custom/branded avatar, and which types of clothing will fit each. Avatar types For the purposes of fitting clothing, avatars can be classified into three categories: Classic - Classic avatars are the original default Second Life avatars. They have a modifiable humanoid shape, and can wear clothing in the form of textures and attachments added to that shape. Most of a classic avatar's appearance and clothing can be modified by pressing the Appearance button in the Second Life Viewer, but cannot take advantage of newer graphical features such as normal and specular maps. Standard mesh - A standard mesh avatar is a classic avatar that is wearing a rigged mesh attachment, usually a full-body avatar, and whose classic body is hidden by a full body alpha mask. It is classified as "standard" if it was created using the standard fitted mesh model available on the Second Life wiki. Custom/branded - A custom avatar is a classic avatar that is hidden by a full body alpha mask and is wearing a customized rigged mesh attachment or attachments that otherwise replace the classic avatar body. These avatars can come in a wide variety of shapes and sizes, and each model typically requires clothing specifically designed to work with such an avatar. Which clothing fits which avatar types? Clothing may be labeled in one of the following ways to indicate which types of avatars it is most likely to be compatible with: Classic only - The "layer-based" textured clothing applied directly to classic avatars. This clothing type only displays properly on classic avatars and is rendered completely invisible by the alpha mask worn by most mesh avatars. Mesh only - An attachment that is designed to appear as clothing on a standard mesh avatar. It may appear to be a layer-based texture, but does not work properly on classic avatars. Mesh only clothing must be created outside Second Life in a 3D modeling tool. Classic/Mesh - Attachments primarily designed for standard mesh avatars that can be made to work on a classic avatar. In order to be classified as classic/mesh, the clothing must include an appropriate alpha mask designed to hide the affected parts of a classic avatar. Branded - A catch-all term meant to encompass the many possible custom avatar designs. Such avatars can typically only wear clothing specifically designed for that specific avatar; therefore each custom designed avatar and its compatible clothing may be considered a "brand". Likewise, clothing designed for a custom avatar shape should not be expected to work properly with classic or standard mesh avatars, or even other custom avatars. Determining your avatar type If you are new to Second Life or rigged mesh avatars, you may have a difficult time trying to determine which type of avatar you are currently using. Here are some tips on determining whether you have a classic, standard mesh, or custom mesh avatar: General tips: Check the name of your avatar or any notecards delivered with the avatar for details on how it was created and what type of clothing may be compatible with it. Ask the merchant who sold the avatar which type of clothing works best with it. Try on a piece of classic avatar clothing and see if it appears correctly When all else fails, there are a few procedures you can try in order to determine which type of avatar you have. Every avatar in Second Life has access to a shared library of items, some of which are outfits composed of clothing for classic avatars. By trying on some classic clothing and observing the results, you can find out whether you have a classic avatar: Log into Second Life and open your inventory by clicking the Inventory button. Find the Library folder in the Inventory window and expand it by clicking the triangular arrow next to it. Expand the Clothing folder in the library. Expand the Male Shape & Outfit folder inside the Clothing folder. Click the item called Boy Next Door Shirt and then press the Wear button at the bottom of the Inventory window. The shirt is then applied to your classic avatar shape. If you have a classic avatar, a gray shirt with blue stripes should appear on your avatar; if you have a mesh or custom avatar, the shirt will not appear on your avatar or may be partially obscured by the avatar's mesh body. Determining whether you have either a mesh or custom avatar can be more difficult, since both are composed of 3D models created outside Second Life and use similar techniques for hiding the default classic avatar. When standard mesh avatars become available in the inventory library, you may use clothing from those outfits in a technique similar to the method described above for determining whether you have a classic avatar. Information for merchants How to label your clothing for sale In order to help shoppers find clothing that properly fits their avatars, merchants can label their merchandise as described above in Which clothing fits which avatar types? Clothing for custom avatars should be similarly labeled by the seller as being compatible with a particular avatar brand. Marketplace instructions The Second Life Marketplace also provides fields for merchants to mark their clothing as compatible with classic, mesh, or branded avatars. To edit these fields as a Marketplace merchant: Click My Marketplace and choose Merchant Home. On the left side of the page, click Manage listings. For each clothing or accessory item you sell under Manage listings, click Actions and choose Edit. On the Edit Item Listing page, you may check boxes under Clothing Works With for clothing that is compatible with Classic Avatars or Mesh Avatars. If you are selling a custom avatar, or clothing that works with a specific custom avatar, you can provide that avatar's brand name under Custom Avatar Brand and provide a URL with brand information under Brand URL. Why create a brand to support clothing fit for your custom avatar? Mesh avatars that are not built using the standard mesh model provided by Linden Lab can usually only wear clothing specifically designed for that custom avatar. By creating a recognizable brand for each custom avatar you sell, you can help your customers identify which clothing and accessories will work with your products. Branding could be described as a way to group together custom avatars and their compatible accessories in order to prevent customer confusion about what clothing will fit their avatars. For example, if a merchant sells a custom avatar called Paper Panda, customers should look for clothing and accessories marked as compatible with the Paper Panda brand. Attempts to wear clothing designed for classic, standard mesh, or other custom avatars would most likely yield disappointing results and wasted Linden dollars (L$). Example situations for clothing merchants The following examples cover some of the possible situations merchants may face when selling an item of clothing in Second Life, and provide suggestions on how to handle communicating what type of avatars each clothing item will fit. If the clothing was developed inworld by clicking Edit my Outfit: On the Marketplace, mark this clothing as Classic avatars only. Inworld, convey that this clothing item only works on Classic avatars. In the clothing folder name, include the words "Classic avatars only" or similar. Linden Lab recommends this practice to help customers find compatible items in their inventories. If the clothing was designed to fit the standard fitted mesh shape and you do not wish to make the clothing work on classic avatars or create the necessary alpha masks: On the Second Life Marketplace, mark the clothing as Mesh avatars only. Inworld, convey that this clothing only works on mesh avatars In the folder name, include the words "Mesh avatars only". LL recommends this practice to help customers find compatible items in their inventories. If the clothing was designed to fit the standard fitted mesh shape, and has also been tested on a classic avatar with appropriate alpha masks to make the clothing look correct: On the Second Life Marketplace, mark this clothing as Classic and Mesh avatars. Inworld, convey that this clothing works with both mesh and classic avatars, provided that classic avatars use the included alpha masks. In the folder name, include the words "Classic and mesh avatars". LL recommends this practice to help customers find compatible items in their inventories. We do not recommend using the words "all avatars" because this clothing will not necessarily work with custom avatars, and may not work with avatar types introduced by Linden Lab in the future. If the clothing is mesh but was not designed to fit the standard mesh shape, and comes in preset sizes to match the variable size of classic avatars, including alpha masks where necessary: Some rigged mesh clothing pre-dates the fitted mesh feature in Second Life and has special sizing considerations. Merchants should take any steps they feel necessary to communicate proper fit for this type of clothing. Often, this type of clothing has been designed to fit classic avatars only. On the Second Life Marketplace, mark this clothing as Classic avatars only. Inworld, convey that this clothing only works on classic avatars. In the folder name, include the words "Classic avatars only". Linden Lab recommends this practice to help customers find compatible items in their inventories. If the clothing was created for a specific custom avatar: On the Second Life marketplace, mark this clothing as Custom and convey which brand the clothing is intended for. Inworld, convey which brand the clothing is for. In the clothing folder name, and/or in a notecard, include information the customer needs in order to locate the branded avatar.
  34. 2 points
    General tips for boosting performance The basics Optimize your preferences Don't display extraneous things Manage your antivirus software Troubleshooting tips Using the statistics bar General tips for boosting performance Tip: Maintain your computer by: Routinely removing unwanted files and programs from the system. Defragmenting your disk drive regularly. Using anti-Malware software to remove spyware, virues, and other malware. Follow the recommendations here to improve overall performance of Second Life and address many common problems. The basics Make sure your computer meets the Minimum system requirements. It's best to exceed them to prevent bottlenecks, since they are the bare minimum required to run Second Life. A slower processor, older video card, or low memory can contribute to slow frame rates. Make sure you have working drivers for your video card. Search the Second Life Community for posts on your video card. The latest driver is not always the best. Make sure your firewalls are properly configured. See Using Second Life with a firewall for more information. Check to see if your hard drive light is showing a lot of activity. If it is, your system may be running low on memory and using hard drive swap space instead, which is significantly slower. Based on statistics collected by Linden Lab: If you are using Windows 8, make sure you have upgraded to Windows 8.1. Our statistics show that Second Life crashes half as often on Windows 8.1 compared to Windows 8.0. If you are using Mac OSX, upgrade to 10.9.3. Our statistics show that 10.9.3 crashes one third less than 10.7.5. Use a 64-bit version of Windows if you can. Even though we don't offer a fully 64-bit viewer for Second Life as of July 2014, our statistics show that Second Life running on 64-bit operating systems crashes half as often as on 32-bit systems. Important: Second Life allows but does not support wireless connections. Always use a hardwired connection if possible. Optimize your display preferences Optimize your preferences to help Second Life run more efficiently. Try the following: Choose Me > Preferences Click on the Graphics tab. Move the Quality and speed slider to Low. Click the Advanced Settings button Move the settings on the Mesh detail sliders to "Mid" or "Low." Automatically playing music and media can be very demanding on some PC equipment. Use manual play instead: Choose Me > Preferences > Sound & Media Deselect Allow Media to auto-play. Review the rest of your preference settings disable any unused features: Choose Me > Preferences or press Ctrl-P). Try disabling settings such as Play typing animation, Name tags, and Arrow keys always move me. Even minor items can add up to significant improvements in performance. For more information, see Setting your preferences. Don't display extraneous things Make sure your Viewer is not displaying unnecessary information that may reduce performance: Choose World > Show> Advanced Menu. Choose Advanced > Highlighting and Visibility. Select Hide Particles. Also: Choose World > Show Disable Property Lines and Land Owners. This improves performance by eliminating gratuitous visual noise. Manage your antivirus software To prevent false cache virus alerts and improve texture cache performance, turn off virus scanning for the following directories and add them to the list of ignored (trusted) directories for Norton AntiVirus: The Second Life skins directory, C:\Program Files (x86)\SecondLifeViewer\skins. The Second Life cache directory. To determine this directory: Choose Me > Preferences. Choose the Advanced tab. Look for the Cache location setting. See also Technical overview of Second Life security. Troubleshooting tips If you followed the advice above and are still experiencing performance problems, try the following. Exit and restart Second Life. This often is enough to fix the problem. Clear the cache. The cache is where the Second Life Viewer stores data on your hard drive for later retrieval. To clear the cache: Choose Me > Preferences. Click the Advanced tab. Click Clear Cache. After you're prompted, restart the Viewer. Check the Lag Meter: Choose Advanced > Performance Tools > Lag Meter. The lag meter breaks lag down into Client, Network, and Server lag, with corresponding indicators for each lag type. Click >> to reveal descriptions and advice for solving any lag problems you are having. Try teleporting to a quieter area or one with fewer objects, to see if the situation improves. Disable antialising. Check your Ping Sim and Packet Loss values: Choose Advanced > Performance Tools > Statistics Bar to open the STATISTICS window. The ping values are the time (in milliseconds) it takes to reach the server from your computer. If this number is high, it could indicate a problem with your network or internet connection. If Packet Loss is a nonzero number, your network or ISP may be having issues. See Using the statistics bar for more information. Check to see if there is anything blocking your computer's ventilation ports, and make sure all the fans are working properly. Laptops in particular can get quite hot when placed on a flat surface, so you may want to try propping yours on a stand to increase airflow, or consider buying a cooling device like a "chill mat". Finally, if you've overclocked or made other modifications to your computer, disable them until you can attain stability. You can use tools like Prime95 to stress-test your computer independently of Second Life. Using the statistics bar The statistics bar presents a detailed list of information about the performance of your computer and Second Life. While the sheer amount of information can be confusing, knowing what to look for can tell you a lot about what's going on in Second Life. To view the Statistics Bar, choose Advanced > Performance Tools > Statistics Bar. Definitions of the various statistics can be found on the Second Life Wiki at Viewerhelp:Statistics.
  35. 2 points
    What is abuse? Reporting abuse Merchant fraud and other scams Setting privacy preferences If the person is nearby inworld If you are being physically pushed inworld If you are being harassed by an object Finding the object with beacons Finding invisible objects Finding underground objects Other tips Dealing with the object If you are being animated Preventing abuse on your land If you are a parcel owner If you are a region or estate owner / manager Additional tips In other languages: Deutsch Français Español Português Italiano 日本語 Türkçe Русский What is abuse? Abuse occurs when someone or something intentionally harasses or bothers you in violation of the Second Life Terms of Service (ToS) or the Community Standards (CS). Abuse is also sometimes referred to asgriefing. Fortunately, in Second Life you control many aspects of your environment: You control your avatar and what it experiences. The best way to prevent harassment or abuse is to use your settings to control your environment and who can interact with you. Important: When you are the subject of abuse or harassment, stay calm and follow the steps outlined in this article. Don't panic! Reporting abuse Although it won't stop an ongoing incident, please report cases of abuse. Choose Help > Report Abuse to file an abuse report. Provide as much detail as possible. For more information, see Filing an abuse report. Tip: You can report a person or object for abuse by right-clicking on them and choosing Report Abuse. Doing this automatically logs the subject's name and exact location in the abuse report. Merchant fraud and other scams In addition to inworld griefing, be on guard for shopping fraud and other scams, both inworld and in Second Life Marketplace. If something sounds too good to be true, it probably is. See also: Tips for safe shopping Scams Phishing FAQ Transactions and disputes between Residents Setting privacy preferences You have a lot of control over what others can see about you in Second Life. Doing this can help to prevent unwanted intrusions and harassment. To set your privacy preferences in the Second Life Viewer: Choose Me > Preferences Click the Privacy tab. Set your preferences. Click OK. For more information, see: Privacy concerns. Online Safety Guidelines If the person is nearby inworld First, simply ask the person to stop their abusive activity. If that doesn't work, try leaving the area. You may wish to put a a safe location in your Viewer's favorites bar for quick access. Finally, you can block the person: Right-click the offending avatar and choose Block. See Blocking for more information. Blocking stops voice and text chat and any visual interference from their avatar and their objects. If you have enabled avatar impostors in your graphics preferences, blocking an avatar also replaces it with a flat gray outline (an "impostor"). Choose Help > Report Abuse and file an abuse report about the incident. Provide as much detail as possible. See Filing an abuse report for more information. If you are being physically pushed inworld If someone (or something) is pushing you or physically assaulting you inworld, sit down! Sitting prevents most physical forces from affecting your avatar. Simply right-click on the ground or something else nearby and choose Sit Here. If you're being harassed in voice chat If someone is harassing you in voice chat, mute them as follows: Choose Communicate > Voice settings... to open the VOICE SETTINGS window. Mouse over the listing for the person you want to mute. Right-click their name and choose Block Voice. If you are being harassed by an object Finding the object with beacons If you are being griefed by an object emitting particles or sounds, do the following: Select World > Show > Beacons. The BEACONS window opens. Under For these objects: select Sound sources andParticle sources. Now objects emitting sounds are shown in yellow and objects emitting particles are shown in blue. Click the ?button in the BEACONS window for more details. Finding invisible objects If you see the beacons but not the source object: Choose World > Show > Advanced Menu to enable the Advanced menu. Chooose Advanced > Highlighting and Visibility > Highlight Transparent or press Ctrl-Alt-T. Doing this makes invisible objects visible and highlighted red. You can see many particle and sound sources with this tool. Finding underground objects To see objects stuck underground: Choose Advanced > Rendering Types Deselect Surface Patch or press Ctrl-Alt-Shift-5. Doing this hides the ground so that you can see beneath it. Other tips The following may also help: Choose Advanced > Disable Camera Constraints, to let you to move the camera beyond normal parameters. Deselect Advanced > Limit Select Distance, to let you to select objects normally outside your reach. Dealing with the object Once you locate the griefing object, block it. This stops all sound and text chat from the object: Right-click on the object. Choose Manage > Block. Tip: To hide bothersome particles, choose Advanced > Highlighting and Visibility > Hide Particles or press Ctrl-Alt-Shift-= You can also try to contact the owner of the object. Right-click on the object. Choose Object Profile. Click on the owner's name to view their profile. Click IM button in their profile and ask them to remove or edit the object. If you are being animated If you are being animated against your will, choose Me > Movement > Stop Animating Me. Preventing abuse on your land If you are a landowner, there are a number of things you can do to prevent abuse and harassment from occuring on your land. Both parcel and region owners can restrict entry to people who are at least 18 years old. For more information, see Age restriction parcel and estate management features. If you are a parcel owner If you have the necessary rights, you can restrict who can enter your land, and freeze, ban, or eject others from land you own or control. For more information, seeManaging other Residents on your land. It's good practice to deselect Object Entry. This stops people from dropping or shooting objects onto the land, and prevents moving objects from crossing into it from a neighboring parcel. You can also restrict who is able to build on your land: Choose World > About Land or just right-click on the ground and choose About Land. Click the OPTIONS tab. Deselect Allow other Residents to: Build. If you are a region or estate owner / manager As a region owner or an estate manager, you have even more control over who can access your land and what they can do on it. As an estate manager, you can restrict access to certain Residents or group members, ban specific Residents, kick out a specific Resident, and so on. To access these controls: Choose World > Region / Estate. Click the Estate tab. As a region owner or manager, you can block people from editing terrain (terraforming), flying, pushing, and so on. To access these controls: To access these controls: Choose World > Region / Estate. Click the Region tab. Additional tips If you are experiencing a griefing attack, and need time to kick and ban troublemakers: Choose World > Region / Estate. Click the Debug tab. Select Disable Scripts and Disable Collisions. Note: Disabling scripts will temporarily stop all scripted objects in the region from functioning. However, as soon as you re-enabled scripts for the region, they will resume normal operation again.
  36. 2 points
    Adding someone to your Friends list How to accept or decline a friendship offer Video tutorial Friendship etiquette Partnering How to make someone your partner How to end a partnership Partnership history Letting friends edit your objects The group method The friend method A few things to note In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano Português 日本语 Adding someone to your Friends list There are several ways to add a friend: If you are near the person inworld, just right-click their avatar and select Add Friend. If you are not nearby or if the person is offline, click the People button at the bottom of the Viewer window and select the FRIENDS tab. Then click the + button to open a search window and type in your friend's name. When you add a friend, the Add Friend window enables you to enter a custom message. Use this space to explain why you would like to be friends, or to remind the person how you know each other. Once a friendship offer is accepted, your names appear in each other's FRIENDS lists. All friendships are bidirectional, so if you delete a friend, you no longer appear in that friend's list. How to accept or decline a friendship offer When another Resident offers friendship to you, a dialog appears in the upper-right corner of your screen. The dialog also appears in the Conversations window as an instant message from the sender. If you click Accept, your new friend receives an onscreen notification that you accepted the friendship offer. Click Decline to cancel the offer. The other person receives onscreen notification that you declined the friendship offer. Friendship etiquette Completing your profile and reading other Residents' profiles provides ample opportunity for conversation. If you get along well, feel free to offer friendship. For unofficial Resident tips about socializing and making friends, see SLetiquette. Partnering Second Life couples can make their relationships official. Whether you're married or just connected, you can designate your partner on your profile inworld and make your relationship visible to the rest of the community. Note: Creating a partnership costs each partner L$10. Partnership is a vanity display for social purposes only. It does not alter inworld permissions, group abilities, support benefits, and so forth. For example, if you are on a Premium account and your partner is on a Basic account, he or she does not receive any Premium benefits. Partnering also does not affect your Second Life username. Nor does it entitle you to share your partner's Second Life account. For more information on our policies regarding sharing accounts, see Permitting Others to Access or Transferring Second Life Accounts. How to make someone your partner To make someone your partner, follow these steps: Go to the Partners page. Enter your Partner's username. Type in your Proposal to your to-be partner. It can be a love letter, song lyrics, or whatever suits the both of you best. Click Send Proposal. Your potential partner is notified at the email address linked with their Second Life account. He or she has seven days to accept. Once the proposal is accepted, your names appear in one another's profiles. The partnership email should be received in seconds. Please check your spam folder and other email filters to make sure it isn't being hidden. If you receive a partnership request you wish to decline, you can do so on the Partners page. How to end a partnership The person who "divorces" is charged L$25. Follow this procedure to dissolve a partnership: Open the Partners page. Select "I, (your name), would like to dissolve my partnership with (your partner's name)." Click Submit. Your partnership is dissolved and your now-ex-partner is notified. Once you have dissolved a partnership, you can recreate it by following the procedure previously outlined and paying the L$10 again. Partnership history Your Viewer profile does not show you the date you started your partnership, so keep your original partnership request (sent via email) if you wish to have a record of the date. Letting friends edit your objects There are two ways to enable a friend to edit your objects in Second Life. This is often referred to as collaborative building or collaborative creation. It's a useful way to let groups of people collaborate on a building project together. The method you choose depends on whether your collaborator is in a group or whether he or she is your friend. The group method To enable a member of a group you are in to edit your objects: Right-click the object and choose Edit. The object editor opens. Click on the General tab in the editor. If you can't see the tabs, click on More. Click on the Tool icon to the right of Group and assign the object to the group your friend is in. Click OK. Select the checkbox next to Share. Any other group members will also be able to edit the object. Group members can only edit objects that are shared with the group. Note: If you want other group members to be able to take copies of your object, make sure you set the next owner permissions (Copy, Modify, Resell/Give away) appropriately. The friend method To enable a friend to edit your objects: Click in the toolbar. The PEOPLE window opens. Click the FRIENDS tab to open your friends list. Mouse over your friend's name and click to view your friend's profile. In the profile page that appears, click and choose Permissions. Under Allow (friend's name) to: select Edit, delete or take my objects. Click Save. Important: Doing this gives your friend the same rights that you have to edit all of your objects. A few things to note There are a few things you should be aware of: Your collaborative partners can only edit objects you've rezzed. Nobody but you will ever have access to your inventory, so if you want someone else to edit an object that you own, you need to rez it inworld first. Your collaborative partners can't edit the next-owner permissions on an object they've been granted access to. It isn't technically possible to link two objects together if they have different owners, even if the owners have given each other edit permissions. Your collaborative partners cannot edit your objects if they have Select Only My Objects enabled under Build > Options in the top menu bar.
  37. 2 points
    Second Life Share is also available for Facebook and Twitter. Opting in to Second Life Share for Flickr Adding and removing the Flickr toolbar button Uploading photos to Flickr from Second Life Opting out of Second Life Share for Flickr Opting in to Second Life Share for Flickr The first time you use SL Share for Flickr, we guide you through the process of opting in. Unless you disconnect your Second Life account from Flickr, you will not need to opt in again: Choose Communicate > Flickr... from the top menu bar to open the Upload to Flickr window. Click the Account tab of the Upload to Flickr window. Click the Connect button; this opens a browser window inside Second Life. Provide your Yahoo credentials as requested, then click Sign In to sign into your Flickr account. Review the permissions you will be granting Second Life in order to upload photos, then click OK, I'LL AUTHORIZE IT to complete the opt-in process. Adding and removing the Flickr toolbar button You can add a Flickr button to your toolbar in the Second Life Viewer, giving you easy access to the Upload to Flickr window: Select Communicate > Flickr... from the top menu bar in the Second Life Viewer. From the Toolbar buttons window, click and drag the Flickr button to the bottom or side edge of the Second Life Viewer window. Edges where you can drop the button are highlighted in blue when you pick up the button. You can now click the Flickr button to open the Upload to Flickr window. This button does the same thing as choosing Communicate > Flickr... from the top menu bar. To remove the Flickr button from your toolbar: Select Me > Toolbar buttons from the top menu bar in the Second Life Viewer. Click and drag the Flickr button from your toolbar onto the Toolbar buttons window to remove it from your toolbar. Uploading photos to Flickr from Second Life Select Communicate > Flickr... from the menu bar at the top of the Second Life Viewer window. Choose a resolution for the photo from the dropdown menu above the image preview. Choose a filter from the dropdown menu above the image preview. No Filter is selected by default. Write a title for your photo in the Title field. Write a short description of your photo in the Description field. You may automatically include your second life location in the description by checking the Include SL location at end of description box. Include any number of tags in the Tags field, separated by spaces. The tag "secondlife" is included by default. Choose a Flickr safety level from the Choose Flickr rating (required) dropdown menu. The safety level is a maturity filter similar to Second Life's maturity rating system, and the exact meaning of Flickr's ratings can be found on Flickr's website. Click Upload to upload your image to Flickr. Photo filters When uploading a photo, you may choose from several predefined filters to add fun and interesting effects to your photos in Second Life: No Filter 1970's Colors - Color correction to give a "vintage 1970" look Autocontrast - Automatic gray rebalancing from dark to bright based on the image luminosity histogram Black & White - Changes the photo to black and white Heat Wave - Adds an aged film effect and vignetting Intense - Intensifies all color saturation for a more cartoonish look Jules Verne - Changes the photo to black and white and adds video scan lines and distortion Lens Flare - Add colorize effects to simulate a film camera light leak and lens flare Miniature - Sharpen and blur regions selectively to give a "tilt shift" effect Newsprint - Use a black and white screening to simulate newspaper screening Overcast - Reduces intensity of colors Sepia - Color conversion to sepia tones and vignette for a retro look Spotlight - Burn the edges and dodge the center to focus the attention in the center of the image Toy Camera - Simulate the look and feel of a film toy camera through vignetting and edge blurring Video - Adds video scan lines for the look and feel of an old CRT screen Opting out of Second Life Share for Flickr If you have opted into Second Life Share for Flickr, you can opt out and disconnect the feature using the following procedure: Select Communicate > Flickr... from the menu bar at the top of the Second Life Viewer. Select the Account tab on the Upload to Flickr window. Click the Disconnect button. This disables the connection and deletes any related cookies. To re-enable SL Share for Flickr, you will need to provide your Yahoo credentials again.
  38. 2 points
    Overview Obtaining grandfathered pricing Region transfers Limited-time "buy down" event How to participate in the buy down event Overview Some older Regions have "grandfathered" or discounted pricing on their monthly maintenance fees. In 2010, we raised the maintenance fees of private Regions to match the increased costs of newer and more powerful server hardware to run new Regions, but allowed existing Region owners to continue paying the original lower monthly rate. While grandfathered pricing was originally a bonus for existing Region owners in 2010, there are options available for those who wish to obtain a grandfathered Region by other means. Obtaining grandfathered pricing Many grandfathered Regions were obtained before February 2010 and have simply retained their original pricing. However, there are ways to obtain a Region with grandfathered pricing, such as a Region transfer or special promotional offer. Region transfers As of November, 2015, you may transfer grandfathered-priced Regions in accordance with the transfer pricing schedule. We are unable to swap the price of a current grandfathered Region with a non-grandfathered Region. Grandfathered pricing stays with the Region for the life of the Region or until it is transferred or converted. If a grandfathered Region is abandoned and subsequently reactivated, its maintenance fee is updated to the current monthly rate for its Region type. Limited-time "buy down" event For a limited time in 2016, we offered a chance to "buy down" the maintenance fees on your existing Regions. By paying a one-time fee, you could take advantage of grandfathered maintenance rates for the lifetime of your Region. The pricing for this offer was as follows: For a full Region: One-time buy-down fee: $600 Grandfathered monthly maintenance fee: $195 each month (regularly $295 each month) On May 29, 2019, the maintenance fee was announced to be lowered to $179 each month (in accordance with a decrease in maintenance fees across several full private region offerings). For a Homestead Region: One-time buy-down fee: $180 Grandfathered maintenance fee: $95 each month (regularly $125 each month) If you plan to keep your Regions for longer than six months, this offer is a great deal! Note: This offer cannot be combined with our Education and Non-Profit discount program, and cannot be applied to Skill Gaming Regions. How to participate in the buy down event This offer has ended as of 11:59PM PDT on October 4, 2016.
  39. 2 points
    How to sell an object Should you sell Original, Copy, or Contents? How to set permissions on an object Bulk-setting permissions Setting default permissions when uploading Setting bulk permissions in an object's contents Advertising rules and etiquette How to sell an object Follow these steps to put an object up for sale: Right-click the object and choose Edit. Click on the General tab. If you don't see it, click More. Select the For Sale checkbox. In the dropdown menu next to the For Sale checkbox, select how you want to sell the object. • Original: Sell that exact object. When a Resident buys the object, it will stay right where it is and change owners. • Copy: Sell a copy of the object. The object will remain where it is, and the purchaser will receive a copy of the object. • Contents: Sell the objects, clothing, etc. in the Contents folder of the object. The purchaser will receive a folder (with the same name as the object) containing a copy of the object's contents (or the contents themselves if they are no-copy). Enter the price of the item in the the Price: L$box just below the For Sale dropdown menu. If you want the item to be searchable on the Second Life Marketplace, select the Show in search checkbox. Read more about selling in the Marketplace. Tip: The best way to sell clothing, animations, or multiple related items is to place them in an object and sell its contents. This works beautifully for complete outfits and costumes! Should you sell Original, Copy, or Contents? Should you sell your inworld Second Life creations as Original, Copy, or Contents? That depends on how the object is presented and what you intend to do with it. See Object sale types for full details. How to set permissions on an object Permissions on an object determine what other people can do with it. To set permissions: If the the object is inworld (rezzed), right-click it and choose Edit, then navigate to the General tab. If the object is in your inventory, right-click it and choose Properties. The entries you want to change are listed under Next owner: Modify: Permits the next owner to modify your creation. Copy: Permits the next owner to copy your creation, retaining a copy in inventory when the object is dragged inworld. Transfer: Permits the next owner to give your creation to someone else. If the object also permits copying, the copies can be sold. If the object does not permit copying, only the original object can be sold. Unchecking this means the next owner cannot give the object to anyone else. Important: Permission settings set while an object is in your inventory are not cross-checked with Contents until rezzed. When transferring an item to another Resident, be sure to rez and retake it first to ensure that its permissions are set correctly. You cannot regain permissions for an object you have given to someone else. Linden Lab is unable to reset permissions on an object. If permissions allow, it is a good idea to create a backup copy of an object before you give it to someone else. This way, you always have a copy of the "most permissive" version of the object! Important: Default permissions are no modify and no copy! Always check permissions before giving objects to others. Bulk-setting permissions The Second Life Viewer includes some features for bulk-setting permissions. That means you can apply permissions across multiple items instead of one at a time. Setting default permissions when uploading To bulk-set permissions when you're uploading images (textures), sounds, or animations: Go to Build > Options > Set Default Permissions. A window appears allowing you to specify Next owner permissions. Choose to allow others to Modify and/or Copy and/or Resell/Give away the objects. (Note that your default permissions also apply to single uploaded items.) Select Build > Upload > Bulk (L$10 per file). Select multiple files by holding down the Shift or Ctrl key, then confirm upload. After the uploads are complete, open your inventory. You can right-click each item and choose Properties to verify permissions have been set correctly. Setting bulk permissions in an object's contents Bulk-setting permissions for items in an object's contents allows you to set permissions by item type (body parts, clothing, etcetera): Right-click an object with contents you want to change and select Edit. Click the Content tab. Click Permissions button. Check or uncheck content (item) types whose permissions you want to change. Under Next owner, choose to enable or disable Modify, Copy and Transfer permissions. When you're satisfied with your settings, click OK. Tip: If you forget to apply permissions when uploading, rez a cube and drag the item(s) from inventory into the cube's contents, where you can set permissions as desired. Advertising rules and etiquette Advertisers must always take care to respect the rights and privacy of other Residents. Here are a few guidelines. Adhere to the Community Standards. Adhere to the Second Life Terms of Service. If you violate any of these rules, your account may be suspended or terminated. Post in the appropriate channels. You might try posting in the designated Classifieds section for a small fee. Many Resident-run forums and publications also welcome advertisers, but make sure to read their advertising rules and policies before you start posting. Keep it legal. You are legally responsible for your own actions in Second Life, for example, the rules for ad farms and network advertisers. Also, Linden Lab will remove without refund any classified ads, event listings, or land descriptions that advertise gambling. Read Selling in the Marketplace to learn more.
  40. 2 points
    Normal maps Specular maps Advanced techniques and technical details Normal and specular maps in Second Life are texture layers that convey additional rendering information to the graphics engine. This additional information is used in conjunction with standard "diffuse" textures to add a whole new level of detail to otherwise flat surfaces without drastically increasing either land impact or graphical or server lag. Tip: Applying a normal or specular map to an object does cause the object's land impact to be calculated using the standard land impact parameters rather than prim count. However, the maps themselves do not contribute to the land impact rating. Normal maps Normal mapping is a method of simulating the lighting of bumps and dents on an otherwise flat surface, creating the illusion of a physically detailed surface. In Second Life, this technique can be used to add detail to a geometrically simple object without significantly increasing the object's land impact or sacrificing graphical performance. The normal map itself is stored as a texture, with the red, green, and blue values representing the X, Y and Z coordinates of the surface normal. To apply a normal map to an object you own in Second Life: Right-click the object and click Edit. Click the Texture tab in the Build Tools window. Click the Texture (diffuse) dropdown menu and select Bumpiness (normal). Click the box above the word Texture to open the Pick: Texture window. Choose a normal map texture from your inventory and click OK. The normal map is applied to your object. Specular maps Specular mapping is a method used to define the shape of shiny or reflective areas on a surface. For example, if a textured surface represents a wooden box with metal parts, a specular map can be applied to define only the metallic portions of the texture as shiny. In Second Life, specular mapped surfaces reflect light cast by either the sun or local lights. Specular maps are stored as RGBA textures; The reflected color is tinted by the RGB value (a red specular map reflects white light as if it is red), and the alpha channel conrols the intensity of the reflected environment map. To apply a specular map to an object you own in Second Life: Right-click the object and select Edit. Click the Texture tab in the Build Tools window. Click the Texture (diffuse) dropdown menu and select Shininess (specular). Click the box above the word Texture to open the Pick: Texture window. Choose a specular map texture from your inventory and click OK. The specular map is applied to your object. Increase Glossiness to increase the reflectiveness of your specular mapped area; increase Environment to increase the intensity of the reflected environment map. Glossiness and Environment are also modulated by the alpha channel of the specular map. Tip: If you want to access the Glossiness, Environment, and Color controls for your entire object without applying a specifically shaped specular map, you may click the Blank button in the texture picker for a completely white texture. Advanced techniques and technical details You can find case studies, advanced techniques, and technical details on Second Life's normal and specular mapping features at the Good Building Practices portal on the Second Life wiki.
  41. 2 points
    Em outros idiomas Adicione alguém à sua lista de amigos Como aceitar ou recusar uma oferta de amizade Tutorial em vídeo Regras de comportamento para amigos Parceiros Como fazer de alguém seu parceiro Como finalizar uma parceria Histórico da parceria Permitir que os amigos editem seus objetos O método de grupo O método de amigo Algumas coisas à observar Adicione alguém à sua lista de amigos Há várias maneiras de adicionar um amigo: Se vocês estiverem próximos no mundo virtual, basta clicar com o botão direito no avatar dele e selecionar Adicionar amigo. Se vocês não estiverem próximos ou se a pessoa estiver off-line, clique no botão Pessoas na parte inferior da janela do Visualizador e selecione a guia AMIGOS. Clique no botão + para abrir uma janela de pesquisa e digite o nome do seu amigo. Quando você adiciona um amigo, a janela Adicionar amigo permite que você digite uma mensagem personalizada. Use esse espaço para explicar porque você quer a amizade ou lembrar à pessoa como vocês se conheceram. Quando a oferta de amizade for aceita, seus nomes aparecerão na lista de AMIGOS um do outro. Todas as amizades são bidirecionais. Se você excluir um amigo, você não aparecerá mais na lista de amigos dele. Como aceitar ou recusar uma oferta de amizade Quando outro residente lhe oferece amizade, uma caixa de diálogo aparece no canto superior direito da tela. A caixa de diálogo também aparece nas janelas de Conversas, como se uma mensagem tivesse sido enviada para você. Se você clicar em Aceitar, seu novo amigo receberá uma notificação na tela de que você aceitou a oferta de amizade. Clique em Recusar para cancelar a oferta de amizade. A outra pessoa receberá uma notificação na tela de que você recusou a oferta de amizade. Regras de comportamento para amigos O preenchimento do seu perfil e a leitura do perfil de outros residentes são uma grande oportunidade de estabelecer conversas. Se vocês se derem bem, sinta-se à vontade para oferecer sua amizade. Para dicas não-oficiais para residente sobre como socializar ou fazer amigos, acesse SLetiquette. Parceiros Os casais no Second Life podem oficializar seus relacionamentos. Se você for casados ou simplesmente conectados podem colocar o nome de seu companheiro(a) no seu perfil in-world. Seu estado civil será visível para o resto da comunidade. Nota: Criar uma parceria custa L$10 para cada parceiro. A parceria é algo para se exibir, somente para propósitos sociais. Isso não altera as permissões inworld, as habilidades de grupo, suporte aos benefícios e assim por diante. Por exemplo, se você é um membro Premium e o seu parceiro tem uma conta Básica, ele/ela não receberá qualquer benefício Premium. A parceria também não afeta o seu nome de usuário no Second Life. Nem dá o direito de compartilhar a conta do seu parceiro no Second Life. Para mais informações sobre as políticas relacionadas ao compartilhamento de contas, acesse Permitindo que outros acessem ou transfiram suas contas no Second Life. Como fazer de alguém seu parceiro Para fazer alguém seu parceiro, siga esses passos: Vá na página Parceiros. Digite o nome de usuário do seu Parceiro. Digite a sua Proposta para essa parceria. Pode ser uma carta de amor, uma letra de música ou o que convier para ambos. Clique em Enviar proposta. O seu parceiro em potencial será notificado pelo e-mail que está na conta do Second Life. Ele ou ela tem sete dias para aprovar. Uma vez que a proposta tenha sido aprovada, seus nomes aparecerão no perfil um do outro. O e-mail de parceria deverá ser recebido em pouco tempo. Verifique sua caixa de spam e outros filtros que seu e-mail possa ter e certifique-se de que não tenha sido escondido. Se você receber uma solicitação de parceria e desejar recusar, você pode fazer isso na Página de Parceiros. Como finalizar uma parceria A pessoa que se “divorcia" é taxada em L$25. Siga os procedimentos parra romper uma parceria: Abra a página Parceiros. Selecione “Eu, (seu nome), gostaria de desfazer a parceria com (o nome do seu parceiro)." Clique em Enviar. Sua parceria está desfeita e, agora, seu ex-parceiro será notificado. Uma vez que tenha desfeito uma parceria, você pode recriá-la seguindo o mesmo procedimento mencionado anteriormente e pagando L$10, novamente. Histórico da parceria O seu Visualizador de perfil não exibe a data em que a sua parceria começou, por isso, guarde a solicitação de parceria original (a que foi enviada por e-mail), se você desejar ter um registro com a data. Permitir que os amigos editem seus objetos Existem duas formas de habilitar que um amigo possa editar os seus objetos no Second Life. Isso geralmente refere-se como construção colaborativas ou criação colaborativa. É uma forma útil de permitir que os grupos de pessoas colaborem na construção de um projeto juntos. O método que você escolhe depende de o seu colaborador está em um grupo ou se ele/ela é seu amigo. O método de grupo Para habilitar um membro de um grupo que você está para editar seus objetos: Clique com o botão direito do mouse no objeto e escolha Editar. O editor de objeto abre. Clique na aba Geral no editor. Se você não puder ver as abas, clique em Mais. Clique no ícone Ferramenta no lado direito do Grupo e atribua o objeto ao grupo que seus amigos estiverem. Clique em OK. Selecione a caixa de verificação próximo à Compartilhar. Qualquer outros membros do grupo também podem ser capazes de editar o objeto. Os membros do grupo só podem editar objetos que forem compartilhados com o grupo. Nota: Se você quiser que outros membros do grupo sejam capazes de fazer cópias do seu objeto, certifique-se de ter selecionado a permissão ao proprietário (Copiar, Modificar, Revender/Dar fim) de forma apropriada. O método de amigo Para habilitar um amigo para editar seus objetos: Clique em na barra de ferramentas. A janela PESSOAS abrirá. Clique na aba AMIGOS para abrir a lista de amigos. Passe o mouse sobre o nome dos seus amigos e clique em para visualizar o perfil do seu amigo. Na página perfil que aparecer, clique em e escolha Permissões. Em Permitir (nome do amigo): selecione Editar, excluir ou pegar meus objetos. Clique em Salvar. Importante: Ao fazer isso, você dará os mesmos direitos de editar todos os seus objetos que você. Algumas coisas à observar Existem algumas coisas que você precisa ficar atento: O seu parceiros colaborativos só podem editar os objetos que você permitir. Ninguém que não seja você terá acesso ao seu inventário. Se você quiser que mais alguém possa editar um objeto seu, você precisa permitir inworld primeiro. Os seus parceiros colaborativos não podem editar as permissões do proprietário em um objeto que eles receberam acesso. Não tecnicamente possível conectar dois objetos juntos se eles tiverem dois proprietários diferentes. Mesmo se os proprietários derem a cada um permissões para editar. Seu parceiro colaborativo não pode editar seus objetos se eles tiverem Selecionar somente meus objetos habilitados em Construir > Opções na barra de menu superior.
  42. 1 point
    他の言語 Tiliaとは? Tiliaでの資金の処理(引き出し) 本人確認のための質問 Tiliaに個人情報を提供しなければならない理由とは?また提供した個人情報の利用目的とは? 認められる身分証明書の種類とは? すでに写真付き身分証明書を提出しています。再び提出しなければならない理由とは? 利用している銀行、クレジットカード会社、PayPalのいずれかによってすでに本人確認が行われています。Tiliaで再び本人確認をしなければならない理由とは? 社会保障番号を持っていません。手続きを進めるにはどうしたらよいでしょうか? 社会保障番号の提供を希望しない場合どうなりますか? 登録時に本人確認のための情報を求められない理由とは? 身分証明書はいつ求められますか? 資金の処理請求を行う前に、確認用に身分証明書を自主的に提出することはできますか? この手続きの所要日数とは? 従わない場合、米ドル残高はどうなりますか? 認められる居住地証明とは? 戸籍上の名前(実名)を変更する場合、提供する必要がある書類とは? Tiliaからのメールを確実に受け取るため、登録済みのメールアドレスを更新する方法とは? 身分証明書の提出を必要としない取引とは? Tiliaの利用に関する質問 Second Lifeのアカウントとは別にTiliaアカウントにアクセスできますか? Tiliaから米ドルを銀行口座に直接引き出せますか? リンデンドルの購入にTiliaを利用する必要はありますか? 休眠アカウント維持手数料の支払いを避ける方法とは? 資金を処理できない理由とは? 技術的な質問&法的な質問 個人情報は安全に保管されていますか? TiliaはGDRPを遵守していますか? Tiliaは個人情報を政府と共有しますか? 提供する個人情報はデータマイニングの目的で使用されますか? 米ドル残高は州に帰属されますか? 米ドル残高がTiliaアカウントに残っている状態でSecond Lifeの住人が亡くなった場合どうなりますか? Tiliaとは? Tiliaは、Linden Labの子会社で、Second Lifeコミュニティに特定の金融サービスを提供し、米国の法規制の遵守を徹底するためSecond Lifeを支援しています。 2019年8月1日付けで、Tiliaはお客様の米ドル残高の管理を引き継ぎ、Tiliaアカウントとして管理いたします。今後はTiliaが、お客様のTiliaアカウントからの資金の処理請求とお支払い手続きの処理を行います。現在お使いのSecond Lifeアカウントに関連付けられたTiliaアカウントが自動作成されます。Tiliaアカウントにアクセスするためのユーザー名とパスワードを新たに設定する必要はありません。 Tiliaでの資金の処理(引き出し) 規制要件を遵守するため、米ドル建ての残高の一部をPayPalまたはSkrillのアカウントに引き出す(資金の処理として知られている処理)を希望される場合は、お客様がご本人であることを確認するため、いくつか個人情報をご提供いただく必要があります。必要な個人情報には以下が含まれます。 名前 住所 生年月日 社会保障番号(米国の国籍をお持ちでない場合、政府発行の身分証明書) また、取引を完了するため追加の情報の提供が求められる場合もあります。Tiliaは、情報を何度も提供していただくことのないよう、一度上記の情報をいただきましたら、安全に保管いたします。 注記:18歳未満のお客様は、2019年8月1日以降、18歳になるまで資金の処理ができなくなります。 重要:12ヶ月間Tiliaアカウントが利用されていない場合、休眠アカウント維持手数料を請求させていただきます。本手数料は、アカウントが再び利用されるまで、Tiliaアカウントに毎月請求されます。本手数料に関する詳細は、Tiliaのサービス利用規約のセクション3.4でご確認いただけます。 本人確認のための質問 Tiliaに個人情報を提供しなければならない理由とは?また提供した個人情報の利用目的とは? 金融サービス業として登録している事業体であるLinden LabおよびTiliaには、適用される米国の法規制を遵守することが義務付けられています。継続的なリスク管理プロセスの一環として、当社は金融関連サービスを提供するお客様の個人情報を入手、確認、記録する必要があります。当社はお客様のプライバシーと安全を極めて重要なものであると考えています。このため、お客様の個人情報は継続的に保護され、Linden LabおよびTiliaのプライバシーポリシーに明記されている目的でのみ使用されるものとします。 認められる身分証明書の種類とは? 認められる写真付き身分証明書は以下の通りです。 運転免許証 パスポート 種類を問わず政府発行の写真付き身分証明書 上記のいずれの身分証明書もお持ちでない場合は、当社のカスタマーサポートまでお問い合わせの上、対応についてお尋ねください。 すでに写真付き身分証明書を提出しています。再び提出しなければならない理由とは? Linden Labが提供する金融関連サービスは今後同社の完全所有子会社であるTilia Inc.によって管理されるようになります。Tiliaには適用される米国の法規制を遵守することが義務付けられています。継続的なリスク管理プロセスの一環として、当社は金融関連サービスを提供するお客様の個人情報を入手、確認、記録いたします。お客様の個人情報は継続的に保護され、当社のプライバシーポリシー(当社ウェブサイトよりご覧いただけます)に明記されている目的でのみ使用されるものとします。 すでに情報を提供いただいている場合、住人の方に情報の再提出をお願いすることはほとんどありませんが、ごく稀にTiliaが再び文書を収集、確認する必要があるケースが発生する可能性があります。 利用している銀行、クレジットカード会社、PayPalのいずれかによってすでに本人確認が行われています。Tiliaで再び本人確認をしなければならない理由とは? 金融サービス事業を運営するTiliaには、金融取引に関連する様々な州法や連邦法を遵守することが義務付けられています。また、これらの各種法律によって、お客様がクレジットカード会社やPayPalなど他の金融機関に本人確認のための情報をすでに提供しているか否かを問わず、この情報を収集し確認することが当社に義務付けられています。 社会保障番号を持っていません。手続きを進めるにはどうしたらよいでしょうか? 米国の国籍をお持ちでない場合は、身分証明書としてパスポートおよび公共料金(電気・ガス・水道)の領収書をご利用いただけます。米国の国籍をお持ちで社会保障番号を持っていない場合は、カスタマーサービスまでお問い合わせください。 社会保障番号の提供を希望しない場合どうなりますか? 社会保障番号をご提供いただけない場合、当社はお客様の取引を処理できません。当社には法律によって社会保障番号の収集および確認を行うことが義務付けられています。 登録時に本人確認のための情報を求められない理由とは? 本人確認のための身分証明書に関する情報の収集は、ゲーム内通貨のアカウントの資金を米ドル建てで引き出すなど、一部の金融取引でのみ必要となります。Second Lifeを使用するための登録にあたり本人確認のための情報の収集を義務付ける規制はありません。 身分証明書はいつ求められますか? 資金の処理請求を開始する際および決済方法として登録されている送金先に米ドル建ての資金を送金する際に、身分証明書が求められます。 資金の処理請求を行う前に、確認用に身分証明書を自主的に提出することはできますか? はい。資金の処理請求を行う前に、確認用に身分証明書を自主的に提出していただくことは可能です。事前にご提供いただくことで、Tiliaで初めて資金の処理請求を行う際に、処理の遅延を確実に防ぐことができます。 Second Lifeウェブサイトの支払情報ページにアクセスしてください。「We may need some additional information in order to process credit from your Tilia account」(Tiliaアカウントからの資金の処理には、いくつか追加の情報が必要となる場合があります」をクリックすると、提出ページにアクセスできます。本人であることが確認されると、表示されるメッセージが「We have all the information we require to process credit from your Tilia account. Thank you!」(Tiliaアカウントからの資金の処理を進めるために必要な情報がすべて揃っています。ご協力ありがとうございます)に変わります。 この手続きに関する詳細は、ブログの「規制で義務付けられている情報の自主的な提出」というタイトルの投稿をご確認ください。 この手続きの所要日数とは? 請求は通常1~3日で処理されますが、場合によっては最長30日の時間を要することがあります。 身分証明書を提出しない場合、米ドル残高はどうなりますか? ゲーム内米ドル残高はお客様のアカウントに残ります。必要な書類を受け取り、確認を行うまで、資金の処理請求は受け付けられません。米ドル残高とリンデンドルは引き続きSecond Lifeのサービス料のお支払いにご利用いただけます。 認められる居住地証明とは? 認められる書類は以下の通りです。また、発行日が3ヶ月以内である必要がありますのでご注意ください。 最新の公共料金(電気・ガス・水道)の領収書 銀行やクレジットカードの取引明細書、資産報告書 携帯電話料金の明細書 賃貸契約書、賃借契約書 納税申告書 有権者登録用紙 保険証明書 必ず明確かつピントが合った書類全体が写っている写真を提出してください。また、必ず必要な情報が写っていることを確認してください。 戸籍上の名前(実名)を変更する場合、提供する必要がある書類とは? お名前が変わる場合には、必ず最新の情報を提出してください。認められる書類は以下の通りです。 氏名変更届 結婚証明書 離婚証明書 同性パートナーシップ証明書 Tiliaからのメールを確実に受け取るため、登録済みのメールアドレスを更新する方法とは? メールアドレスの更新をご希望の場合は、こちらのリンク(https://accounts.secondlife.com/change_email/)をクリックし、更新を行ってください。当社はメールアドレスの確認およびメールアドレスが最新のものであるかの確認を行うことをお客様に推奨しています。 身分証明書の提出を必要としない取引とは? 身分証明書の確認が必要となる取引には、資金の処理請求、すなわち、PayPalまたはSkrillアカウントへの米ドル残高の一部またはすべての引き出し請求が該当します。したがって、通常以下の種類の取引においてお客様に個人情報の提供を求めることはありません。 お支払い方法を問わずリンデンドルのご購入 クレジットカード、PayPal、またはSkrillでのプレミアム会員費や土地使用料などSecond Lifeのサービスに対するお支払い リンデンドルのご利用 LindeX上でのリンデンドルの売却 Tiliaの利用に関する質問 Second Lifeのアカウントとは別にTiliaアカウントにアクセスできますか? 現時点ではできません。TiliaアカウントはSecond Lifeアカウントに統合され、Second Lifeのログイン情報でログインできるSecond Lifeウェブサイト経由でご利用いただけます。Tilia提供のサービスには、その旨がはっきりとわかるように印が付けられる予定です。 Tiliaから米ドルを銀行口座に直接引き出せますか? 現時点でTiliaから銀行口座に資金を直接引き出すことはできませんが、米ドル残高をPayPalやSkrillに引き出すことは可能です。 リンデンドルの購入にTiliaを利用する必要はありますか? いいえ。Tiliaはリンデンドルの購入処理に関わっていません。リンデンドルのご購入には今後も引き続き登録済みのお支払い方法をご利用いただけます。また追加の個人情報の提供は不要です。 休眠アカウント維持手数料の支払いを避ける方法とは? 12ヶ月間Tiliaアカウントが利用されていない場合、3ドル未満の休眠アカウント維持手数料を毎月請求させていただきます。この少額の月額手数料は、お客様のアカウントを維持するために要するエンジニアリング、サポート、会計処理、コンプライアンス関連の維持手数料に充てられます。休眠アカウント維持手数料により、お客様の米ドル残高をマイナスに減らすことはできません。また、本手数料により、新たにクレジットカードに請求が行われることは絶対にありません。休眠アカウント維持手数料は、リンデンドルの残高に影響しません。 Second Lifeウェブサイトで最低12ヶ月に1回アカウントにログインするだけで、休眠アカウント維持手数料を避けることができます。また、プレミアム会員である限り、プレミアム会員の住人に対して休眠アカウント維持手数料が請求されることはありません。 資金を処理できない理由とは? 当社でお客様の個人情報の確認が完了していない場合、資金の処理請求を受け付けることはできません。 技術的な質問&法的な質問 個人情報は安全に保管されていますか? 当社はお客様の懸念を十分に理解しています。お客様の個人情報は、当社のプライバシーポリシーに明記されている通り保護されています。インターネット経由で情報を提供することに抵抗がある場合は、カスタマーサポートまでお問い合わせの上、追加の提供方法についてご相談ください。 お客様の個人情報を保護するために当社が導入している方法に関する詳細は、当社のブログの「Tiliaにおけるプライバシーとセキュリティに関する情報」というタイトルの投稿をご確認ください。 TiliaはGDRPを遵守していますか? Tiliaは、EU一般データ保護規則(GDRP)を徹底遵守しています。詳細については、当社のプライバシーポリシーをご確認ください。ご自身のアカウントや状況について具体的なご質問がありましたら、当社カスタマーサポートまでお問い合わせください。 Tiliaは個人情報を政府と共有しますか? 召喚状や捜索令状など法的措置を受け情報を提供せざるを得ない場合を除き、Tiliaはいかなる政府に対しても情報を提供しません。 提供する個人情報はデータマイニングの目的で使用されますか? Tiliaは一切データマイニングに関わっていません。したがって、お客様のデータがデータマイニングの目的で使用されることや、第三者に販売されることはありません。TiliaはLinden Labの子会社であり、Second Lifeの商取引の基幹システムを強化しつつ、当社のプロセスとお客様の個人情報の保護も強化することを存在意義としています。 米ドル残高は州に帰属されますか? はい。Tiliaは、すべての州の未請求資産(unclaimed property)に関する法律を遵守します。 米ドル残高がTiliaアカウントに残っている状態でSecond Lifeの住人が亡くなった場合どうなりますか? 本トピックに関する当社のWikiの記事「Linden Lab公式情報:Second Lifeの住人の死亡およびその他の懸念事項について」にアクセスし、当社の現行の方針をご確認ください。
  43. 1 point
    Graphics card basics Cost What to do if you're having graphics problems Tip: If you want to learn about whole systems that run Second Life well, see choosing a computer! Graphics card basics Your graphics card (also called a video card) is the hardware that creates the images shown on your monitor. This card does much of the work involved in calculating and drawing the 3D world for applications like the Second Life Viewer. As a result, your graphics card plays a crucial part in your Second Life experience. To find out what kind of graphics you have, get your system info. Important: Make sure your graphics card is Second Life capable! If your card doesn't meet our System Requirements, you may not be able to use Second Life at all. Cost While prices around the world vary, these days you can easily find a graphics card that exceeds our Recommendations — one substantially above the minimum Requirements — for US$50-100. The Buying graphics cards page contains helpful suggestions from fellow Residents about where to purchase your card. What to do if you're having graphics problems Important: Always carefully follow the manufacturer's instructions. Consult the websites below for details and support. On Windows: ATI/AMD drivers NVIDIA drivers Intel drivers Apple integrates hardware and software more closely than Windows. Problems are less likely, but there are fewer revisions and workarounds (provided through Software Update). The following procedure, called a clean install, will often fix problems related to graphics cards and drivers: Download the latest graphics driver from the chipset manufacturer (ATI, Nvidia, or Intel), not the maker of your graphics card or computer. Save the file where you can easily find it, but do not install it yet. Run Windows Update and make sure your system is fully patched. Reboot your computer and enter Safe Mode by pressing F8 at the Windows logo screen. Uninstall your old video driver. On Windows XP use Control Panel > System > Hardware > Device Manager (steps will be different on other operating systems). Then open Display Adapters, right-click and choose Uninstall. Reboot your computer. If Windows displays a message that it found new hardware, do not let it automatically install drivers. Instead, run the installation program that you downloaded in step 1. Reboot your computer You should now have a clean version of your video driver. If this doesn't solve the problem, try searching the Issue Tracker for known issues. Note: Intel Extreme graphics are not compatible with Second Life. It may be possible for certain configurations of hardware and software to successfully run Second Life while using Intel Extreme graphics; however, these configurations are inherently unstable. Note about NVIDIA drivers NVIDIA graphics cards may cause driver-related problems. After installing the latest NVIDIA drivers, the Second Life® Viewer may crash with an error message that states: "Second Life is unable to run because your video card drivers did not install properly, are out of date, or are for unsupported hardware." This appears to be a problem with the NVIDIA drivers' initial installation: the first time the install process is run, something fails silently — a file or set of files doesn't copy properly, but the installer doesn't give you any notice that something went wrong. There is a solution: ensure that all of your applications are closed, and install the NVIDIA drivers again. For some reason, the drivers almost always install correctly the second time. If these steps do not solve your problem, please see NVIDIA's Driver Installation Hints. Note about Windows Vista Second Life requires that the Windows drivers for the system's graphics card fully support the OpenGL graphics standard. Any graphics card whose installed driver does not support OpenGL detects as a "GDI Generic" instead. This message means that Second Life has detected no hardware with OpenGL support. It's up to the graphics vendor (Nvidia or ATI) to provide drivers that support both OpenGL and your operating system. As of this writing, we have successfully run Second Life on Vista under several PCs equipped with Nvidia's Geforce graphics cards. If you receive this message under Vista, are running graphics hardware that meets our Minimum System Requirements, and can't find a driver provided by your graphics vendor that provides OpenGL support, you'll be unable to run Second Life under Windows Vista on that computer.
  44. 1 point
    Maturity ratings overview What are maturity ratings? General Moderate Adult Setting your maturity preferences Maturity ratings and media access Voice and maturity ratings Gestures, sounds, and maturity ratings Examples Parcel media and maturity ratings Maturity ratings and search Web Search Second Life Search Classifieds Marketplace Viewer Search General Content Moderate Content Adult Content Classifieds, Events, Land Sales, Places People tab Groups tab FAQs I can't access all of the content checkboxes. Why are they unavailable? I'm getting an error and can only access General content. What do I do? How do I ensure my objects show up in search with the correct maturity rating? I don't see the Adult option in my Preferences. How do I activate it? In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Português Italiano 日本語 Русский Türkçe Maturity ratings overview Important: The Second Life maturity ratings are: General ("PG" in previous Viewers) Moderate ("Mature" in previous Viewers) Adult What are maturity ratings? Maturity ratings designate the type of content and behavior allowed in a region and affect search results. There are three maturity ratings in Second Life: General, Moderate, and Adult. General content is accessible by all Resident accounts, including those owned by individuals who are under 18 years of age. Moderate content is accessible by all Resident accounts over the age of 18 by default. To access Adult search results and regions, you must choose to activate Adult content in your Preferences and be at least 18 years old. For more information on how to access adult content, see Accessing Adult land and content. Note: Regardless of maturity rating, all content in Second Life must abide by our content guidelines. For the official content guidelines, including examples of prohibited content, please see Content Guidelines. General A region designated General is not allowed to advertise or make available content or activity that is sexually explicit, violent, or depicts nudity. Sexually-oriented objects such as "sex beds" or poseballs may not be located or sold in General regions. General regions are areas where you should feel free to say and do things that you would be comfortable saying and doing in front of your grandmother or a grade school class. Institutions such as universities, conference organizers, and real world businesses may wish to designate their regions as General. Likewise their users (and others) may wish to employ Second Life's General search setting to focus and filter search results appropriately. Some landowners and Residents desire a Second Life experience distinct from the activity that occurs in Moderate and Adult regions. Region owners who wish to host this sort of Second Life experience can (but need not) designate their regions as General. If you are a region owner and you feel there is some ambiguity as to whether your content and activities are allowed in General regions, it's probably best to designate your region as Moderate. Tip: Bookmark Community Standards and Terms of Service so you have the overall rules handy! Moderate Second Life's Moderate designation accommodates most of the non-adult activities common in Second Life. Dance clubs, bars, stores and malls, galleries, music venues, beaches, parks, and other spaces for socializing, creating, and learning all support a Moderate designation so long as they do not host publicly promoted adult activities or content and do not use adult search tags. Groups, events and classifieds that relate to this broad range of activities and themes generally should also be designated as Moderate. Residents in these spaces should therefore expect to see a variety of themes and content. Stores that sell a range of content that includes some "sexy" clothing or objects can generally reside in Moderate rather than Adult regions. Dance clubs that feature "burlesque" acts can also generally reside in Moderate regions as long as they don't promote sexual conduct, for instance through pose balls (whether in "backrooms" or more visible spaces). However if any of these businesses uses adult-oriented search tags, the region may be categorized as Adult and blocked from appearing in non-Adult search. Adult The Adult designation applies to Second Life regions that host, conduct, or display content that is sexually explicit, intensely violent, or depicts illicit drug use. A region must be designated Adult if it hosts, advertises, or publicly promotes: Representations of intensely violent acts, for example depicting death, torture, dismemberment or other severe bodily harm, whether or not photo-realistic (meaning that images either are or cannot be distinguished from a photograph). Photo-realistic nudity. Expressly sexually themed content, spaces or activities, whether or not photo-realistic. We broadly define what is "sexually themed" to include any sexually oriented activities and conduct. Groups, event listings and classified ads that reference these themes or content must also be designated Adult. Linden Lab will enforce these rules but cannot monitor all ephemeral content and conduct within Second Life. Therefore: Regions, groups, and event or classified ad listings that employ search tags plainly suggestive of adult behavior or content require the Adult designation, and will be viewable only by Residents that have opted-in and are at least 18 years old. Linden Lab will conduct proactive monitoring and rely on abuse reports that identify adult content or conduct that is promoted or advertised publicly. Where adult content or conduct on a region is publicly advertised or promoted, that region must be designated as Adult (or such content must be removed). We will re-designate such regions if adult content is not removed. Linden Lab may take into account whether apparent or reported adult content or conduct in a particular region serves only an extremely limited or passive function, or an important educational or cultural function, and therefore would be appropriate for all Second Life audiences. As with all reported activity in violation of our policies, we will actively review all reports of adult conduct and provide Residents with a channel for rebuttal. Parcels that host adult activities or contain adult content must be on: The adult mainland continent, Zindra. A private region that has been designated by its owner as Adult. Region owners are responsible for designating a region's maturity level. Occupants of regions will be expected to locate in a region suitable to each occupant's content and conduct. For more information on what qualifies as adult content, see Adult Content FAQ. Setting your maturity preferences Choose Me > Preferences and click on the General tab to choose the maturity rating of content you want to see. For more information, see Accessing Adult land and content. Maturity ratings and media access Your own maturity setting, as well as the maturity setting of land parcels near you, can affect your ability to hear sounds and voices. Voice and maturity ratings Regions that use the Adult maturity rating use a separate estate channel for voice communication. This means that if you are in an Adult region, you can only speak with other Residents who are also in nearby Adult regions. If you are in an Adult region and you stand near the border of a General or Moderate region, Residents in the other region cannot hear you speak, and you will be unable to hear them speak. Text chat crosses region borders normally, regardless of maturity ratings. Note: Group and private voice chats are not affected by region maturity ratings, and always function the same way regardless of your location. Gestures, sounds, and maturity ratings Gestures and other sounds played in Second Life are handled differently than voice chat; your personal maturity rating determines whether or not you are able to hear sounds originating from a Moderate or Adult region. Your personal maturity rating must meet or exceed the maturity rating on the region you wish to hear sounds from. Examples If your rating is set to General, you can only hear sounds and gestures that originate from a region that is also rated General. If your rating is set to Moderate, you can hear sounds and gestures that originate from regions that are rated General or Moderate. If you are at least 18 years old and your maturity rating is set to Adult, you can hear sounds and gestures originating from any nearby region, including Adult regions. Parcel media and maturity ratings By definition, Land parcel media is confined to the parcel for which it is set. If your avatar is not authorized to enter a land parcel, you cannot view or hear streaming media playing on that parcel. Maturity ratings and search The Second Life Viewer filters search results based upon your current maturity preferences and the maturity ratings of the discovered content, while the Second Life website shows only results with a General rating. Web Search You can locate content in Second Life from these web pages: Second Life Search - returns only General results Classifieds - returns only General results Marketplace - returns results based on your chosen maturity level if you are at least 18 years old. By default, all results returned on these web pages are for General maturity. Second Life Search Go to search.secondlife.com or click the Search button on the Second Life website to search for: People Places Events Groups Information on the Second Life Wiki Information on Secondlife.com After executing a search, choose a category tab on the left side of the page to filter results. Select Everything to search all categories. Results are ranked on both relevance to your search terms and on popularity of the item. While logged into the Second Life website, you can filter search results for General, Moderate,and Adult content by checking the respective boxes under the search field. Classifieds Log into the Second Life website and choose Community > Classifieds to browse the Community Classified ad listings. To narrow results: Click + More Options. Select a category from the dropdown. Select a maturity rating. By default this selection will match your preference in the Viewer. Click Submit. Only General classified ads are shown on the website; use the Viewer to browse Moderate or Adult listings if you are at least 18 years old. Marketplace When you search for product listings in the Second Life Marketplace, you can set a maturity level to restrict results. For more information, see Shopping in the Marketplace. Viewer Search Click the Search button on the toolbar to open the Second Life Search window. Enter a search term and click Search. The window has seven filters both on the left and in the dropdown menu, as shown below: By default, results for Everything are shown, drawing from People, Places, and Groups. Click on the other tabs to show only results of that type: Classifieds, Events, Destination Guide, Groups, Land & Rentals, People, and Places. Results are ranked according to relevance to the keyword and the popularity of the item. If you are at least 18 years old, you can also search for Adult content in addition to General and Moderate content by checking the appropriate Maturity box at the top left of the Second Life Search window. General Content If your preferences are set for General and Moderate or General, Moderate, Adult, you can still filter your search for General-only results. Check the General box on the search window. Type your search into the search field and click the Search button. General content includes listings on a General region that do not contain adult keywords. Moderate Content To include Moderate content in your search results, check the Moderate box in the search window. Moderate search results includes listings in a Moderate region that do not contain adult keywords. Adult Content To include adult content in your search results, check the Adult box in the search window. Anything on an Adult region is adult content. You must be at least 18 years old in order to search for adult content. You can help us refine our adult content filtering by submitting a support request if your listing is being blocked or showing up incorrectly. If you find search results listing objects that do not match General or Moderate search filters, please submit an Abuse Report. If you have objects on General or Moderate land that use adult keywords, those objects should not be shown in search, or they may have Abuse Reports filed against them. Classifieds, Events, Land Sales, Places Adult content search is available on these tabs when: You are at least 18 years old. You have enabled your adult preferences. You have checked the Adult content box in the search window. If you enter an adult term in search without having met the above three criteria, the search system filters this term from the search query and provides results using the remaining terms entered. Classifieds and Events Tabs New classifieds and events are filtered for maturity content. If you attempt to create a classified or event using adult terms on non-adult land, you will receive an error message. If you find a classified or event listing in an inappropriate maturity category through search, please file an abuse report. Land & Rentals and Places Tabs On these tabs: Check the General box to show only search results in General regions. Check the Moderate box to show search results in Moderate regions. Check the Adult box to show search results in Adult regions. People tab The search system does not filter keywords when you search for avatar names or profiles. Information in Resident profiles should be General. Please refer to our Community Standards for details. Groups tab The search system filters searches in the Groups tab the same way as in an Everything search. Groups can be marked as Moderate or left unchecked for non-Moderate groups. If a group's name or Group Charter uses adult keywords, the group appears only in Adult searches. FAQs I can't access all of the content checkboxes. Why are they unavailable? By default, Resident accounts of those over 18 years of age have access to General and Moderate content. If you are at least 18 years old, you can opt-in to seeing Adult content by setting your preferences to view content with the Adult designation. Account owners who are under the age of 18 only have access to General content. I'm getting an error and can only access General content. What do I do? If you're seeing the word "Error" on the Second Life Search page next to the maturity checkboxes and only the General checkbox is enabled, and you are not under the age of 18, your Viewer may not have sent the correct authorization token. To reset your authorization, close the Viewer and log back in. If you continue to receive the error, make sure you're using the latest version of the Second Life Viewer before filing a support request. Note: Third-party viewers may not support Moderate and Adult searching. For best results, use the official Second Life Viewer published by Linden Lab. How do I ensure my objects show up in search with the correct maturity rating? Tip: If your land appears in search results at a higher maturity level than you expected, it may be a sign that your content is inappropriate to the maturity rating of your region. Using language that is inappropriate to your region's maturity rating is against Second Life's Terms of Service and can result in disciplinary action. Information about the region you're in, including region name, coordinates, maturity, and parcel name are located at the top of your Viewer. If your region is listed as General, make sure any objects you set to show in search are also General. If your region is listed as Moderate and you would like to show Moderate objects in search, check the Moderate Content box in the ABOUT LAND window's OPTIONS tab. I don't see the Adult option in my Preferences. How do I activate it? You must be at least 18 years old to access the Adult setting. If you are 18 years of age or more, and you don't see an Adult option in your Preferences, please see Accessing Adult land and content for more information. You may need to contact our Support team for assistance.
  45. 1 point
    What are environments? The Environmental Enhancement Project (EEP) How to customize your environment Personal Lighting Apply Only to Myself Pause Clouds Parcel environment settings Region environment settings Environment settings objects Skies Water Day Cycles Environment settings permissions Copy and No-copy Transfer and No-transfer Modify and No-modify Creating and editing settings Creating a new settings object Editing settings objects Saving and importing settings Importing existing Windlight settings Editing a Sky setting The Atmosphere & Lighting tab Creating rainbows The Clouds tab The Sun & Moon tab Editing a Water setting Editing a Day Cycle setting Sky and water tracks Frames and the timeline Previewing your day cycle Legacy environment controls What are environments? The Environment Editor gives you a fine degree of control over Second Life's sky, water, and atmosphere. Imagine a strange alien planet with a purple sky, or a smoggy, overcast city! This guide will help you to understand the many controls at your disposal, and set you on the path to becoming a weather-controlling mad scientist. You can also use subtler lighting effects to make your screenshots look fantastic, like adding a rosy glow to a sunset sky or golden highlights for your beach photos. Feeling the seasonal spirit? Add fog and clouds to give your environment a wintry chill, or increase the ambient light and ditch the clouds for a hot summer sizzle. Note: In order to see all of the sky effects you will need OpenGL 2.0 or higher. If you have the latest drivers for your graphics card and still cannot see certain atmospheric effects (such as clouds) try enabling Basic Shaders and Atmospheric Shaders in the Graphics tab of your Me > Preferences menu. The Environmental Enhancement Project (EEP) The Environmental Enhancement Project (EEP) is a set of viewer- and server-based tools which not only allow Residents to customize their environments even further, but to create objects with their favorite settings to share or sell with others. Instead of a complicated process of downloading settings files from websites or adjusting settings one by one, Residents can trade or buy custom environments and use them on their parcels, just for themselves, or on a full region (if they're a private region owner or estate manager). EEP also introduces personal lighting, a quick and easy way to temporarily adjust environments wherever you go. While these adjustments can't be permanently saved, they're wonderful for making tweaks to your lighting or environment to get that perfect screenshot on the go. In addition to the new settings objects and personal lighting, EEP has added new environmental settings which allow you to add spectacular effects like ice halos around the Sun and Moon and most dazzling of all — rainbows! How to customize your environment Because the viewer determines how to display the sky, water, and day cycle to you, environmental settings allow you to change how the world looks in several different ways. The Personal lighting window allows you to set quick, temporary changes to your environment no matter where you are. These changes are only visible to you, and they go away when you log out and back in again. Want something a little more permanent? You can create or customize a sky or water preset with the Sky Preset Editor and save it to use later. Many great presets are already available in our Library, and can be applied to yourself, your parcel, or your region. You can also copy them to your inventory to edit for that special, custom look. You can also right-click and choose Apply Only to Myself on any settings object in your inventory to update your personal environment at any time. If you own or have permissions to change the environment on a parcel of land, you can set custom environmental settings on the World > About Land > Environment tab. Other visitors to that parcel will share the same environmental experience by default. Private region owners or estate managers can also set custom environmental settings for their entire region through the World > Region/Estate > Environment tab. The Sunrise, Midday, Sunset and Midnight options from World > Environment will set your sky to ✏️ Tip: You can apply any settings object in your inventory or the Library by right-clicking on the object and choosing Apply Only To Myself to test out how it looks. To return to the parcel or region's shared environment, select World > Environment > Use Shared Environment. Personal Lighting The Personal Lighting window can be opened from World > Environment > Personal Lighting. In one window, you can customize many of the most important environmental settings in one place, based on whatever environmental settings you're currently experiencing. For example, if you visit a spooky haunted house region, the environment may be customized to be very dark, foggy, and mysterious. When you load the Personal Lighting window, you see the spooky settings loaded into the options, and can adjust them as you like. You cannot save these adjusted settings, though, and they'll go away once you log out and log back in again. For more information about the various settings options, see the Sky settings, Water settings, and Day Cycle settings sections below. Apply Only to Myself To apply any saved environment preset from a settings object, locate the settings object in your Inventory > Settings folder or the Library > Environments folder, then right-click Apply Only to Myself. This will instantly change your environment to reflect the settings you've selected. You can reset your personal environment at any time by clicking World > Environment > Use Shared Environment Pause Clouds The Pause Clouds option from World > Environment > Pause Clouds stops the animation on clouds and waves, freezing them in place until the option is unchecked. This is only visible to you, and can be checked or unchecked at any time. Parcel environment settings You can set custom environments for a parcel by opening the About Land's Environment panel from World > About Land > Environment. From here, parcel owners can choose to use the region's settings, to apply settings objects from inventory, or to customize the current settings on the parcel. For group-owned land, members must have a role with the ability Modify environment settings and day cycle in order to change these settings. If you right-click on a settings object and select Apply to parcel, the setting will be applied to all available settings options. For a sky setting, this would set the same sky at the ground, Sky 2, Sky 3, and Sky 4 altitudes. If you apply a day cycle setting to a parcel from inventory, it will apply to all available options — water, ground, and all sky levels. Sky Altitudes allow you to set different skies at different heights, creating specific areas. This is particularly useful if you have a skybox or use multiple levels of your land or region for different purposes, but it can also create a lovely visual effect. Imagine taking off from a foggy ground-level airport and climbing to a clear sunrise above! For more information about the various settings options, see the Sky settings, Water settings, and Day Cycle settings sections below. ✏️ Note: Region owners may choose not to allow parcel owners to change their environment settings. If your parcel is in a private region, you may wish to speak to the estate manager or region owner if you have questions about setting custom environments on your land. Region environment settings Region owners and estate managers may set custom environment settings on through the Region/Estate window by opening World > Region/Estate > Environment. Much like the About Land window, this allows region owners to set different skies at different altitudes as well as selecting the specific environmental options they'd like for their regions. Region owners can also check or uncheck the Parcel Owners May Override Environment box. If checked, owners of parcels in the region can set their own custom environments through the About Land windows. If unchecked, all parcels in the region will use the region's default environment settings. For more information about the various settings options, see the Sky settings, Water settings, and Day Cycle settings sections below. Environment settings objects EEP provides 3 new inventory assets called settings. Settings may be created and destroyed through your inventory, and they may be given to other people or sold through the Marketplace. You can view your current environmental settings objects by checking your Me > Inventory > Settings folder, or by opening the My Environments window from the World > Environment > My Environments menu. Skies Sky settings define the look of the sky. They control the color and direction of the ambient light, the images used to display the sun and the moon, and their positions in the sky. They also control the atmospheric conditions, like the color and density of clouds or how much moisture is in the air. Water Water settings define the look of Linden water. Some of the settings include the water's color, how reflective the surface is, and the shape and direction of the waves. From a crystal-clear tropical sea to a murky, apocalyptic lagoon, custom water settings allow you to match your water to your mood. Day Cycles Day cycles are collections of skies and waters that blend together to form the environment for an entire day. You can set a foggy sky for the morning, a bright sun for the afternoon, and a cozy rainbow for sunset; the quality of the light, the colors, and the clouds can be adjusted to change throughout the day cycle. Different water settings can be applied throughout the day to change the appearance as time progresses, too. Environment settings permissions Environment settings objects have a few special behaviors when it comes to object permissions. Aside from these special behaviors, they can be shared, sold at : shops, or sold on the Marketplace like other object types. Please note that environment settings objects can't be set to no-copy — sorry, gacha fans! Copy and No-copy Environment settings objects cannot be set to no-copy. The owner of an environment settings object may always make a copy of it in their inventory. Transfer and No-transfer The no-transfer permission is persistent. For example, if you import a no-transfer day or water settings object into a day cycle, that day cycle will also become no-transfer. Once saved, this permission change cannot be altered. The day cycle will always remain no-transfer. Modify and No-modify Modify and no-modify permissions behave as normal. Creating and editing settings Creating a new settings object To create a new settings object (like a new Sky or Water), click the plus button (➕) in your Inventory window, then select New Settings > New Sky, New Water, or New Day Cycle. You can also access the Settings folder from the World > Environment > My Environments... menu. Editing settings objects To edit a Settings object, select the item in your inventory or My Environments list and click Open. Depending on the type of settings object, an editor will open. The Sky Editor allows you to customize skies, the Water Editor allows you to customize the appearance of default water, and the Day Cycle editor lets you assign specific sky and water settings to different times of day. For more on each of the editors, see the detailed sections below. Saving and importing settings After you've made changes to a settings object using the editor window, you can select Save on the lower left to save the updated settings to your inventory. Please note that using the Save button will override your previous settings, if you had any. If you'd like to save a new copy of the item instead, be sure it has a unique name in the Name box at the top of the editor, then click the up arrow to the right of the Save button to choose Save as.... This allows you to create a new copy of the item with your newly selected name. Importing existing Windlight settings If you've already customized your region, or you have saved personal Windlight settings that you like to use, you can import them to the viewer directly via the Import button. Once you've imported a Windlight file, it turns into a settings object that you can edit in the editor window Open World > Environment > My Environments... At the bottom of the window, click ➕ (+) to Make new setting Select New Sky, New Water, or New Day Cycle A new object is created in your inventory's Settings folder, called New Sky, New Water, or New Day Cycle Double-click or right-click and choose Open to open this new item for editing In the editor window that appears, enter a name for your setting in the Name box Click the Import button on the upper right of the editor window Navigate to your chosen existing Windlight .xml file and select it in your computer's file selection window Your custom settings will be imported. Click Save to save your settings as a new object. Clicking the Import button will open your computer's file selection window, just like uploading a texture or snapshot. To locate your existing Windlight files, you may need to do a bit of searching, depending on which operating system and viewer you use. Importing Windlight settings on a Mac Your existing Windlight settings are saved on your Mac in a Library folder which is generally not visible by default. You can open this folder by using Finder. For convenience, it's often easiest to drag your Windlight folder onto your Favorites list temporarily. This will make it easy to find from the file selection menu later. In Finder, from the menu bar, select Go > Go to Folder… Paste the following link into the entry box: ~/Library/Application Support/SecondLife/user_settings/windlight/ Click Go If you like, drag your Skies, Water, or Day Cycle folders onto the Favorites bar to the left to find them again easily when you use the Import button inside Second Life. Your skies, water, and day cycle settings will be located inside the folders of the same name. Importing Windlight settings on a Windows computer Your Windlight folder location may vary depending on which version of Windows you have, and whether or not you’ve installed the Second Life Viewer in a different location than your primary hard drive. In File Explorer, navigate to the following folder: C:\Program Files\SecondLifeViewer\app_settings\windlight Some earlier versions of Windows, like Windows 7, may have the settings located here: C:\Users\USERNAME\AppData\Roaming\SecondLife\user_settings\windlight 💡 Tip: Having trouble? It’s sometimes easier to search for a folder than to locate the folder directly. Searching for Windlight in your operating system’s search menu should direct you to the right folder if you can’t locate it. This will also help you find Windlight settings from any third party or alternate viewers you may have installed, too. Editing a Sky setting The Sky Editor contains detailed controls for modifying environmental effects in the sky, as the name suggests. It is where you make visual changes to sky settings objects, altering the color and intensity of the light, the density of the clouds, even what the Sun and Moon look like. It contains three tabs, each with a number of sliders and color selection boxes for manipulating the sky's appearance. You may also save, import, and load sky settings to use in Day Cycles or to apply to yourself whenever you'd like. The Atmosphere & Lighting tab The Atmosphere & Lighting tab of the Sky Editor controls the color of the light, the haze and moisture levels in the air. Ambient Color: This is a universal light that applies color across the region equally. It casts no shadows, unlike the sun and moon. In traditional film or television, this effect is often created by placing colored filters across lights to create a gentle, even wash of colored light. Generally, set your ambient color to the color and brightness you want your darkest shadow to be. ✏️ Tip: Cloud cover also affects your ambient light. If your cloud cover is set to 1, your environment will be brighter, with a more intense ambient light effect. Blue Horizon: Use the color picker box to adjust the color of the sky. In meteorological terms, this setting affects "atmospheric scattering", which is the scientific answer to the age-old question, "Why is the sky blue?" Blue Density: Blue Density affects the overall color saturation of your sky. If you move the Saturation slider (right) down, your colors will become brighter and more vibrant. If you move it all the way up, your colors will become duller, eventually fading to black and white. If you'd like to fine-tune your sky's color balance, you can control individual elements of saturation by using the color picker to adjust the color details, like Red, Blue, Green, Saturation and Luminosity. ✏️ Tip: Blue Horizon and Blue Density are particularly closely related. Imagine Blue Horizon as the base color for the sky, and Blue Density as the sky's color intensity and color balance effects. Try turning Haze Density to zero and playing with these settings for yourself to get a better feel for how they interact with each other. Haze Horizon: This setting affects the height of haze on the horizon. At higher settings, the haze will reach up into the sky and obscure the actual horizon. Haze on the horizon can help to accentuate the sun, and create a dusty, smoggy, or humid effect. This setting will not work if Haze Density is set to zero. Haze Density: Haze density affects the amount of haze you can see in the atmosphere. At lower settings, this can make for some great outdoor views in dusty or tropical environments, and at higher levels it can create a thick, vision-obscuring fog. If you set Haze Density to zero, the Haze Horizon setting will have no effect. Moisture Level: The moisture level in the atmosphere contributes to creating visible rainbows. The maximum value for the moisture level setting is 1.0. To see a rainbow, set your Moisture Level to 1.0, your Droplet Radius to 600, and adjust your Sun position to the horizon. Facing the sun, turn all the way around to face away from it, and your rainbow will be visible on the opposite horizon! Droplet Radius: The droplet radius setting influences the visibility of rainbows; adjust the droplet radius to change the intensity of your rainbow. Scene Gamma: This control adjusts your environment's distribution of light and darkness. Lower settings will cause everything to appear dim or extremely dark, while higher settings may make the scene look white and "washed out", depending on your ambient light color. The default setting for scene gamma is 1.0. Adjusting the scene gamma is one way to make an environment more vivid or more gloomy. Ice Level: Increasing the ice level will create a halo-effect around the Sun and Moon. Like rainbows, you must have shadows enabled in your Graphics preferences to see a Sun or Moon halo. Fun fact! If both the Sun and Moon are visible at the same time, only the Sun will show a halo – the halo is formed from direct light bouncing through tiny crystals of ice in the atmosphere, and the Moon's light just can't compete with the Sun. Density Multiplier: The Density Multiplier can be used to affect the overall atmospheric density. At lower settings, it creates a feeling of "thin air", and at higher settings, it creates a very heavy, smoggy effect. Distance Multiplier: This setting affects your perceived distance within the atmosphere. To make everything look hazy and distant, move the slider to the right. If you want to completely remove the Sky Settings' effects from terrain and objects, set the slider to zero. Max Altitude: Adjusts the altitude calculations Second Life makes when it is computing atmospheric lighting. At later times of day, it can be useful for calculating how "deep" a sunset appears, while at noon it can be used to achieve proper brightness values. Creating rainbows To create a rainbow in your sky, you need a few things: A Sun that's low on the horizon (near sunrise or sunset) A moisture level of 1.0 A droplet radius of 600 A camera angle facing away from the sun You can adjust the moisture level and droplet radius to change the style of your rainbow once you can see it, creating a sharper or fuzzier band of colors. Play with the settings until it looks just right! ✏️ Tip: You must have Atmospheric Shaders, the Advanced Lighting Model, and Shadows enabled under Me > Preferences > Graphics > Advanced Graphics to view rainbows. The Clouds tab This tab gives you control over the clouds in the sky: Cloud Color: This affects the color of your clouds, if you have any. Use the color selector to choose the color (Red, Green, Blue values), the Luminosity, and the Saturation of your clouds. Cloud XY/Density: Use the X and Y sliders to change the horizontal position of all clouds in the sky. The D slider affects the overall density of the individual clouds; at low settings you will see thin, wispy clouds, and at higher settings you will see thicker, more solid clouds. Cloud Coverage: As the name implies, this control sets the amount of cloud coverage. At zero, there isn't a cloud in the sky, but at higher settings, you can get a completely overcast effect. Cloud Scale: This setting affects the perceived altitude of the clouds... if you slide the control to the right, it will make the clouds appear to be higher in the sky. Cloud Detail (X, Y, & D): These settings affect the detailed image of your clouds. The X and Y sliders shift its horizontal position, and the D (density) slider controls how puffy or fractured your clouds appear. Cloud Scroll X & Y: These settings affect the direction and speed at which the clouds float in the sky. Cloud Image: This selector lets you choose a new image map for your clouds. For best results, make sure your texture is seamless; the Library has a Default Cloud Map texture available if you need to reset your clouds for any reason. The Sun & Moon tab This tab controls the sun, ambient lighting, and the stars: Sun Color: This setting affects the color of the light your sun and moon produce. Keep in mind that the color of your sunlight/moonlight will affect the color of your sky! To change Sun/Moon Color, use the color selector box. Sun and Moon Position: The Sun and Moon Position boxes adjust where the Sun and Moon appear in the sky, projected onto a sphere. By rotating the sphere, you can change where the Sun (or Moon) is in the sky. ✏️ Tip: Click the Show Beacon box to set a red beacon arrow pointing at the Sun or Moon. Even if they're below the horizon or hiding behind terrain or buildings, the beacon will show where they currently are. Image: This option allows you to set a custom texture for the Sun or the Moon. Scale: This determines how large the Sun is in the sky. Glow Size: This setting defines the size of the sun's glowing aura. Glow Focus: This setting adjusts how much the sun blurs over the sky. At very high settings, Focus can cause the sun to completely wash out a portion of the sky with brilliant light, and at zero, it will cause the sun (but not the light it casts) to disappear from the sky. Star Brightness: Star Brightness defines how visible the stars are in the sky. If you play with this slider while the sun is up, you can see stars in the middle of the day! Editing a Water setting Some of the water settings you can edit include: Water Fog Color: This changes the color of the particulate matter in your water, essentially defining the color of the water itself. If your water has no fog, it will appear crystal clear and colorless. Density Exponent: Controls the density of your water fog; this setting defines how far you are able to see into the water. Underwater Modifier: Controls how the fog density changes when you are underwater. Useful for creating far-seeing views when underwater while keeping the surface fairly opaque. For example, at a setting of 0.25, the water fog is 1/4 as dense while underwater as it appears from above the surface. Fresnel Scale: Determines how much light is reflected at different angles; increasing this slider reduces visual reflection effects on the water's surface. Fresnel Offset: Determines how much total light is reflected; increasing this slider increases the amount of light reflected by the water's surface. Normal Map: Controls the normal map used for determining reflections and refractions. Any texture may be used for this setting, but true normal maps work best. Second Life's wave effects are generated by superimposing a large normal map image over a smaller version of itself. Try snake skin, tiles, or any other normal map for some wacky effects! Reflection Wavelet Scale: Controls the scale of the three wavelets that make up the surface of the water. Big Wave Speed: Adjusting the crosshairs box controls the X and Y direction and speed of the large wave image. Little Wave Speed: Adjusting the crosshairs box controls the X and Y direction and speed of the small wave image. Refract Scale Above: Controls the amount of visual refraction you can see from above the water's surface; this is the "wobbly" effect you can see when you look at an object that is underwater. Refract Scale Below: Controls the amount of visual refraction you can see from below the water's surface. This is the "wobbly" effect you can see when you look at an object that is above the water. Blur Multiplier: Controls how waves and reflections are mixed. Increasing this setting increases the amount of distortion you see in reflections as a result of wave activity. Editing a Day Cycle setting Bring up the Day Cycle Editor by selecting an existing Day Cycle settings object from your inventory Settings folder, or by creating a new settings object. You can open up the My Environments window to easily view your existing environment settings and the Library's collection of settings by opening World > Environment > My Environments... The Day Cycle Editor gives you control over the sky during Second Life's day/night cycle by setting keyframes along a timeline representing times of the day. These are nodes (represented by dots on the timeline) that have associated sky and water presets. As the time of day progresses, the sky "animates" as it shifts between these keyframes. This is useful for creating everything from photorealistic day/night cycles to strange alien environments. For each keyframe dot on the timeline, you can set a different Sky Setting for each altitude level on the left (Ground Level, Sky 2, Sky 3, and Sky 4) as well as the Water. For example, you can create a day cycle that has a foggy sky setting at 6am, a clear sky at 12pm, and a warm sunset at 6pm. To do that, add a keyframe node at 6am on the timeline and choose a foggy sky setting for it from the Load Sky button. Then repeat the process for noon and sunset. To create a basic Day Cycle: Type a new name in the Preset Name box, or click the Import button on the right to import legacy Windlight settings. Move the yellow arrow slider to a time of day, for example, 6am. Click Add Sky to add a keyframe node dot to the timeline. Click the dot to select it; it will turn green. On the right, click Load Sky, then select the sky preset you'd like to use at this time of day from your Settings folder in your inventory. Continue clicking Add Sky at various times of day, selecting the sky you'd like to use at that time of day. If you're on the Water track, the button will say Add Water. It works the same as Add Sky, allowing you to select an existing Water settings object from inventory and applying it to that specific time of day. When you have a day cycle timeline that you're happy with, you can use the Clone Track button to copy it to the other altitudes. As a tip, set your Ground timeline first. Then click Sky 2 and select Clone Track to copy the skies and nodes you added to the Ground level to Sky 2. Repeat for Sky 3 and 4. If you'd like to change the sky based on different altitudes, you can click the button and make any adjustments you want. You can drag the yellow arrow along the timeline to preview what your day cycle will look like at different times. When you're finished, click Save to save the preset. The yellow arrow above the timeline represents your current view, based on time of day. Click and drag it to see how your day will animate. You may add or delete keyframes by pressing the Add Sky and Delete Sky buttons to the right of the timeline. You can adjust the time position of a keyframe by dragging it along the timeline or by entering the time in the Time box with your chosen keyframe node selected. Sky and water tracks There are four Sky tracks in a Day Cycle: Ground Level, Sky 2, Sky 3, and Sky 4. There is one Water track. Why so many? Having multiple day cycles for different altitudes lets you have flexibility for what your environment looks like in different places. If you have a lovely farm down at ground level, but decide to open a spooky castle on a platform at 2000 meters in the air, you can have a sunny day at the farm while the spooky castle is foggy and dark. Frames and the timeline The dots on the timeline represent a time when the sky (or water) changes; it might be as simple as the light changing to pink and orange at sunrise or sunset, or as complex as a dozen atmospheric changes to represent storms moving across the region. Previewing your Day Cycle Click the ▶️ (play) arrow to play your day cycle. The yellow indicator will move along the timeline, showing what your day cycle will look like as time progresses. Click the tab forward or back button next to the play arrow to move to the next or previous dot on the timeline. Legacy environment controls Some Second Life Viewers may not have implemented the new Enhanced Environment options yet. For those Viewers and for older Viewers still in use, the legacy environment controls can provide customization to the Viewer's skies, water, and day cycle. Note: You will not be able to edit some environment settings with legacy controls, and in some instances, viewers that do not support the Environmental Enhancement Project (EEP) changes may display the environment differently. The Environment Editor (Legacy Controls) To edit the sky and water, you must first open the Environment Editor. You can do this by selecting World > Environment Settings > Environment Editor > Environment Settings. In the Environment Settings window, you can choose between Use region settings and Customize my environment. Using region settings will display the region's shared environment, which is what everyone else in the region would see by default. Choosing to customize your environment will allow you to select custom water, sky, and day cycle options that are only visible to you. The Sky Preset Editor The Sky Preset editor contains detailed controls for modifying environmental effects. It is where you make visual changes to sky and atmosphere presets, also known as "keyframes" (see Day Cycle Editor for more about keyframes). It contains three tabs, each with a number of sliders for manipulating the sky's appearance. You may also save and load sky settings when you find a view you like. Opening the Sky Preset Editor The Sky Preset Editor is located in the Environment Editor: Go to World > Environment Editor > Sky Presets Select New Preset to create a new Sky Preset. Alternatively, select Edit Preset to edit an existing Sky Preset. Editing a Sky Preset The Atmosphere Tab This tab controls elements of the atmosphere itself: Blue Horizon: Use the color picker box to adjust the color of the sky. In meteorological terms, this setting affects "atmospheric scattering", which is the scientific answer to the age-old question, "Why is the sky blue?" Blue Density: Blue Density affects the overall color saturation of your sky. If you move the Saturation slider (right) down, your colors will become brighter and more vibrant. If you move it all the way up, your colors will become duller, eventually fading to black and white. If you'd like to fine-tune your sky's color balance, you can control individual elements of saturation by using the color picker to adjust the color details, like Red, Blue, Green, Saturation and Luminosity. Tip: Blue Horizon and Blue Density are particularly closely related. Imagine Blue Horizon as the base color for the sky, and Blue Density as the sky's color intensity and color balance effects. Try turning Haze Density to zero and playing with these settings for yourself to get a better feel for how they interact with each other. Haze Horizon: This setting affects the height of haze on the horizon. At higher settings, the haze will reach up into the sky and obscure the actual horizon. Haze on the horizon can help to accentuate the sun, and create a dusty, smoggy, or humid effect. This setting will not work if Haze Density is set to zero. Haze Density: Haze density affects the amount of haze you can see in the atmosphere. At lower settings, this can make for some great outdoor views in dusty or tropical environments, and at higher levels it can create a thick, vision-obscuring fog. If you set Haze Density to zero, the Haze Horizon setting will have no effect. Density Multiplier: The Density Multiplier can be used to affect the overall atmospheric density. At lower settings, it creates a feeling of "thin air", and at higher settings, it creates a very heavy, smoggy effect. Distance Multiplier: This setting affects your perceived distance within the atmosphere. To make everything look hazy and distant, move the slider to the right. If you want to completely remove the Sky Settings' effects from terrain and objects, set the slider to zero. Max Altitude: Adjusts the altitude calculations Second Life makes when it is computing atmospheric lighting. At later times of day, it can be useful for calculating how "deep" a sunset appears, while at noon it can be used to achieve proper brightness values. The Lighting Tab This tab controls the sun, ambient lighting, and the stars: Sun/Moon Color: This setting affects the color of the light your sun and moon produce. Keep in mind that the color of your sunlight/moonlight will affect the color of your sky! To change Sun/Moon Color, use the Red/Green/Blue (RGB) sliders, or use the Intensity (I) slider to move all three RGB sliders at once. Sun and Moon Position: The Sun and Moon Position setting affects the vertical position of the sun and moon, from sunrise (0.0) through noon (0.25), sunset (0.5), midnight (0.75) and back to sunrise (1.0). Note that this setting is different than Time of Day in the Basic Environment Editor. The Time of Day setting shifts through your WindLight keyframes (see The Day Cycle Editor), while the Sun and Moon Position setting only affects the physical location of the sun and moon. East Angle: The East Angle affects the horizontal position of the sun/moon, and is similar to azimuth. At settings of 0.0 and 1.0, the sun will rise in the East and set in the West. The settings in between define the entire circle of the horizon; at a setting of 0.5, the sun will rise in the West and set in the East, at a setting of 0.25 the sun will rise in the South and set in the North, etc. Sun Glow: There are two settings under Sun Glow: Size defines the size of the sun, and Focus adjusts how much the sun blurs over the sky. At very high settings, Focus can cause the sun to completely wash out a portion of the sky with brilliant light, and at zero, it will cause the sun (but not the light it casts) to disappear from the sky. Ambient: This controls the color and intensity of ambient light in the atmosphere. This is used for simulating how the light from the sun is scattered by the atmosphere and other objects once it hits the Earth. You can create a very bright sun, and a relatively dark world (think of a sunset!) with an Ambient setting of zero, but if you want to simulate mid-day illumination while the sun was low in the sky, you need to increase the Ambient setting. Scene Gamma: This control functions similarly to the Gamma setting in the Graphics Hardware Settings (formerly Adv. Graphics) tab. It adjusts your screen's distribution of light and dark output. Lower settings will cause everything to appear dim, while higher settings may make the scene look gray and "washed out". Scene Gamma is more precise than the older Gamma in that it only affects your rendered view of the SL world- not the menus and rest of your computer's screen. Star Brightness: Star Brightness defines how visible the stars are in the sky. If you play with this slider while the sun is up, you can see stars in the middle of the day! The Clouds Tab This tab gives you control over the clouds in the sky: Cloud Color: This affects the color of your clouds, if you have any. Use the individual Red/Green/Blue sliders to change the color, or the Intensity (I) slider to drag all three at once. Cloud XY/Density: Use the X and Y sliders to change the horizontal position of all clouds in the sky. The D slider affects the overall density of the individual clouds; at low settings you will see thin, wispy clouds, and at higher settings you will see thicker, more solid clouds. Cloud Coverage: As the name implies, this control sets the amount of cloud coverage. At zero, there isn't a cloud in the sky, but at higher settings, you can get a completely overcast effect. Cloud Scale: This setting affects the perceived altitude of the clouds... if you slide the control to the right, it will make the clouds appear to be higher in the sky. Cloud Detail (XY/Density): These settings affect the detail imagery of your clouds. The X and Y sliders shift its horizontal position, and the D slider controls how puffy and/or fractured your clouds look. Cloud Scroll X and Cloud Scroll Y: These sliders affect the direction and speed at which the clouds float in the sky. You may also check the Lock checkbox to prevent clouds from moving on the selected axis. Naming and save your Sky Presets Enter a name for your new sky preset in the Preset Name box and click Save at the bottom of the window to save your preset for future use. Sky Presets are essentially snapshots of WindLight slider settings you can re-load later or use as keyframes in the Day Cycle Editor. Creating presets is useful both for re-loading your favorite settings and for creating day cycle animations using the Day Cycle Editor. Edit Day Cycle Bring up the Day Cycle Editor by selecting World > Environment Editor > Day Presets > New Preset or Edit Preset (to edit an existing preset). The Day Cycle Editor gives you control over the sky during Second Life's day/night cycle by setting keyframes along a timeline representing times of the day. These are nodes (represented by dots on the timeline) that have associated sky presets. As the time of day progresses, the sky "animates" as it interpolates between these keyframes. This is useful for creating everything from photorealistic day/night cycles to strange alien environments. For each keyframe dot on the timeline, you can set a different Sky Setting in the box below the timeline. For example, you can create a day cycle that has a foggy sky setting at 6am, a clear sky at 12pm, and a warm sunset at 6pm. To do that, add a keyframe node at 6am on the timeline and choose a foggy sky preset from the Sky Setting dropdown, then repeat the process for noon and sunset. To create a basic Day Cycle: Type a new name in the Preset Name box, or choose an existing day cycle preset to edit by choosing it from the dropdown menu. Move the yellow arrow slider to a time of day, for example, 6am. Click Add Key to add a keyframe node dot to the timeline. Click the dot to select it; it will turn green. From the Sky Setting dropdown menu, select the sky preset you'd like to use at this time of day. Continue adding keyframe nodes at various times of day, selecting the sky you'd like to use at that time of day. You can drag the yellow arrow along the timeline to preview what your day cycle will look like at different times. When you're finished, click Save to save the preset. The yellow arrow above the timeline represents your current view, based on time of day. Click and drag it to see how your day will animate. You may add or delete keyframes by pressing the Add Key and Delete Key buttons to the right of the timeline. If the Add Key button is grayed out, you may need to move the yellow timeline slider to a different time; when a valid time is available, the Add Key button should light up. You can adjust the time position of a keyframe by dragging it along the timeline or by entering the time in the Time box with your chosen keyframe node selected. Edit a Water Preset The Water Preset window contains detailed controls for modifying water effects. Here you can modify water fog, reflection properties, refraction, and reflection normal maps. Opening the Water Preset Editor Advanced water settings are located in the Water Preset window: To create a new water preset, go to World > Environment Editor > Water Presets > New Preset You can edit an existing water preset by clicking World > Environment Editor > Water Presets > Edit Preset Some of the water settings you can edit include: Water Fog Color: This changes the color of the particulate matter in your water, essentially defining the color of the water itself. If your water has no fog, it will appear crystal clear and colorless. Fog Density Exponent: Controls the density of your water fog; this setting defines how far you are able to see into the water. Underwater Fog Modifier: Controls how the fog density changes when you are underwater. Useful for creating far-seeing views when underwater while keeping the surface fairly opaque. For example, at a setting of 0.25, the water fog is 1/4 as dense while underwater as it appears from above the surface. Reflection Wavelet Scale: Controls the scale of the three wavelets that make up the surface of the water. Fresnel Scale: Determines how much light is reflected at different angles; increasing this slider reduces visual reflection effects on the water's surface. Fresnel Offset: Determines how much total light is reflected; increasing this slider increases the amount of light reflected by the water's surface. Refract Scale Above: Controls the amount of visual refraction you can see from above the water's surface; this is the "wobbly" effect you can see when you look at an object that is underwater. Refract Scale Below: Controls the amount of visual refraction you can see from below the water's surface. This is the "wobbly" effect you can see when you look at an object that is above the water. Blur Multiplier: Controls how waves and reflections are mixed. Increasing this setting increases the amount of distortion you see in reflections as a result of wave activity. Big Wave Direction: Controls the X and Y direction and speed of the large wave image. Little Wave Direction: Controls the X and Y direction and speed of the small wave image. Normal Map: Controls the normal map used for determining reflections and refractions. Any texture may be used for this setting, but true normal maps work best. Second Life's wave effects are generated by superimposing a large normal map image over a smaller version of itself. Try snake skin, tiles, or any other normal map for some wacky effects!
  46. 1 point
    Inventory links About A link is not the same as a copy Finding links in your inventory Creating new links Does wearing a link also wear the original item? Can an outfit contain a mix of original items and links? If I copy an original item and modify it, will links created to each copy be independent? Do links cause inventory bloat? Caveats Inventory links About An inventory link points to an original inventory item. If you're familiar with aliases on Mac OS X and symbolic links on Windows and Linux, inventory links behave similarly. A link itself is meta, meaning it's entirely referential, dependent on the original, and carries no unique properties that can be modified independently of the original. A link is shown in italics with the word "(link)" beside it: Links were introduced to accompany the new outfit system in Viewer 2, which makes it easier to switch between sets of clothes or entire avatar looks. In Viewer 1.23 and earlier, making a new outfit would copy all copyable items and move all no-copy items into a single folder, meaning that you could not include no-copy items in multiple outfits. Now, making a new outfit creates a link to each item instead. By making multiple outfits, multiple links to a single item can be created, which simplifies keeping track of your original inventory items. Great if you have a pair of shoes you like wearing with several outfits. Here's a popular example: You go on a shopping spree and buy several clothing items, each of which comes in its own folder. Some of these items have multiple variations in their own folder which you won't be wearing all at once, like a skirt that comes in several lengths, or hair that comes in several colors. You want to wear these items as a cohesive outfit for quick future retrieval so you won't have to waste time digging around in each folder. But, you don't want to wreck the original folder structure since there may be other items in them like documentation you want to preserve. (Fashion-related goods often include a "read me" notecard, a landmark to the shop, and sometimes a texture with a picture preview.) By saving a new outfit, a folder with links to all of the items you're wearing is created. You can easily wear all the items the folder's contents are linked to in a few clicks. A link is not the same as a copy Warning: Be careful when deleting original items if you've made links to them. If you delete an original item, all links to it break since there's nothing to point to. While links may be convenient when you want to refer to the same item in several outfit folders, each link is entirely dependent on an original item. Copying an item creates a unique instance of the item that can be copied further, and, dependent on permissions, can be modified or transferred. Keep in mind that links are references without unique properties. For example, you can rename a copied item, but you can't rename a link. Finding links in your inventory Search your inventory for "(link)" to see all links. To find the original item that a specific link is connected to, right-click the link and choose Find Original. Inversely, if you click an original item in inventory, you can find all links pointing to it by clicking at the bottom and choosing Find All Links. Creating new links You can't arbitrarily create a link via the usual right-click context menus. To create links, items must be worn on your avatar, and you must create a new outfit, either by clicking the Save Outfit button in the My Appearance sidebar tab, or clicking the Make Outfit button in the Appearance editor. However, links can be deleted from your inventory just like any original item: Click the My Appearance sidebar tab. Click the My Outfits tab. Right-click a link and choose Remove Link. If the item is worn, you need to choose Detach From Yourself or Take Off, then right-click again to see Remove Link. This throws the link in your Trash. Alternatively: Click the Inventory sidebar tab. Find the link you want to delete. It may be in the My Outfits system folder. Click the link. Press the Delete key or right-click the link and choose Delete. Note: Links are always dependent on original items, never the other way around. Deleting a link doesn't affect the original in any way. The reverse isn't true: deleting an item breaks all links to it. Does wearing a link also wear the original item? Not exactly. Remember, the link merely points to the original item. You aren't actually wearing the link per se, the link tells you (1) the name of the original item and that (2) the original is worn. Therefore, if you "wear" a link, all instances of the link become bold in your inventory, as does the original item. This doesn't mean you're wearing multiple copies of the same thing, because links are not copies. Can an outfit contain a mix of original items and links? Yes. This only happens if you manually drag original items into an outfit folder. It doesn't happen if you use Make Outfit as described above, because that always creates links to original items. Similarly, an outfit can contain entirely original items with no links, which may be the case if you dragged a pre-Viewer 2.0 "outfit folder" into the current My Outfits system folder. We know being able to make an outfit that has copies of the original items is desirable in some cases, like if you're a content creator making color variations of a suit, so we're investigating future possibilities. If I copy an original item and modify it, will links created to each copy be independent? Yes. Here's why: copying an original item then modifying it results in the the copy being its own unique instance. (You can verify this by right-clicking an item in inventory, choosing Copy Asset UUID, then pasting that. For example, copy a shirt, change the copied shirt's color, then compare UUIDs.) Therefore, links to a copy of an item treat this copy as its own "original item". If you copy "item A" so that the copy is "item B" and link to "item B", deleting "item A" doesn't break the links. Updating existing links with a new object You can change which object a link points to, allowing you to simultaneously update many outfits with an updated item. To update a link with a new object: Open your inventory by clicking the Inventory button. Find the original object you used in your outfits (the one all your links point to). Right-click the object in your inventory and choose Replace Links to open the Replace Inventory Links window. The window also shows how many links have been made to this original object. In your Inventory, find the new object you wish to replace your old object with. Drag the new object onto the New field in the Replace Inventory Links window. Click Start to update all links with the new object. Do links cause inventory bloat? If you're specifically referring to the total time it shows "Fetching X items..." after you've cleared cache, links count the same as other inventory items. For example, if you were to create 100 outfits and each contains 10 links, that has the same net effect as loading 1,000 original items. You might think of this like a giant spreadsheet, where each original item and each link has a row. Keep in mind that this is a simplified example; other factors like server lag may also affect loading time. However, there are a couple advantages to using links: From your perspective, convenience is a big advantage of links. While it still takes time to load your inventory, particularly if you have 10,000s of items, it can take you less time to switch between outfits instead of micromanaging nested folders as was commonly the case before Viewer 2.0. From Linden Lab's technical perspective, by reducing the need for redundant copies of the same items worn in multiple outfits, asset space is saved. An inventory link counts as an "entry" in our database, but doesn't have a corresponding unique asset, so the original item that's referred to by a link doesn't take up twice (or more) of the space that making a copy of it would. Linden Lab strongly recommends you keep your inventory item count relatively low, just like you wouldn't want a real backpack full of clutter. Periodically archiving or trashing items you never use goes a long way towards saving you future time. Caveats Some of these limitations may be changed in the future. They include common confusions Linden Lab has been asked about frequently. As of Viewer 2.0.1, it's important to know: Links can't be copied-and-pasted freely. Any changes to an original item affects all links. In other words, no matter how many links point to an original item, there's only one original item. For example, say you have a no-copy pink hat that you've linked to from two outfit folders. You want the hat to remain pink in one outfit folder, but be green in the other outfit folder because that suits the rest of your outfit better. This doesn't work, since the link merely points to the original, and doesn't circumvent the permissions system by creating new copies. Along the same lines, renaming an original item also renames links to it. All of a link's properties are dependent on the original item. Links incorrectly show as broken in some circumstances. For example, if the target inventory item hasn't been fetched (loaded) yet. Wait and see if it resolves. If that doesn't work, try right-clicking a link and choosing Find Original to confirm. Rezzing a no-copy object that a link points to breaks the link. This is because a link depends on an object's unique key, its UUID, to refer to. By removing a no-copy item from your inventory, the link has nothing to point to. Taking the item back into your inventory doesn't restore the link. If you want to edit no-copy attachments, the workaround is to edit it while attached, rather than dropping it on the ground. You will get a warning before dropping an attachment, but it won't tell you that doing so breaks the link. Finding originals that are linked to only works in the My Inventory tab, not the My Outfits tab. My Outfits is a subset view of My Inventory that only shows original items and links that are within the My Outfits system folder, with each outfit in its own folder with this icon:
  47. 1 point
    How to tell if land is owned by a group Deeding land to a group Estates and Private Regions Buying land for a group Excess group land Restricting access to group land Managing objects on group-owned land About auto return Reclaiming group land Group-owned land facillitates collaboration between group members, making it easy to work together on builds and other projects. How to tell if land is owned by a group To find out if land is deeded to a group: Right-click the land and choose About Land. Click the GENERAL tab If it says next to Owner you see (Group Owned), then the land is deeded to a group. Deeding land to a group Group-owned land is held collectively by a group, not by any one group member. For the group to own land, its members must submit land contributions, donations that members make from their own personal land tier allowance. The group can own a total amount of land whose area equals 110% or less of the sum of all group contributions. Tip: The Land Use Fees calculator shows your current fees and has the option to calculate your estimated fees for square meters owned or donated to group. To give land to a group but continue to pay for it yourself: Right-click the land and choose About Land. In the GENERAL tab, click Set and select the desired group. Select Allow Deed To Group, then Owner Makes Contribution With Deed. Click Deed. Note: To deed land to a group, you need the ability to deed and buy land for the group. Furthermore, the region needs to have Allow Land Resell set in the Region/Estate window. Estates and Private Regions Provided that it is not an Openspace region, you can deed land on an estate if you are the region owner or if the covenant on the estate allows you to resell your parcel. This process is handled slightly differently than on the mainland. A few things to consider: It is best if the group you select does not own any land on the mainland. Estate land and mainland are handled differently, and groups that own both often run into complications. Your group may for example lose certain features (such as traffic reporting) that are calculated differently for estates and mainland. The estate owner is the only person responsible for paying Linden Lab for land on an estate; mainland rules for land use fees (tiers, group land contributions, etc) do not apply. Accordingly, donot select Owner Makes Contribution With Deed, as the estate land requires no tier contribution. The land management system considers deeding a change of ownership, so you cannot deed land to a group if the Allow Land Resell checkbox is unchecked in the Region tab of the Region/Estate window. To deed estate land to a group: Select World > Place Profile > About Land to open the About Land window. Select the group you want to deed to. As always, you must have the ability to deed land to this group. Select the Allow Deed to Group checkbox. Click the Deed button. Important: Do not select the Owner Makes Contribution With Deed option. Note: Group members do not gain access to the estate tools. Group land on an estate can be reclaimed by the estate owner at any time. Buying land for a group When shopping for land, you can buy a parcel for your active group. This puts the parcel directly under the group's ownership without first belonging to you. Before purchasing, confirm that your group's land allocation is equal to or higher than the size of the parcel, and that your active group is the group for which you wish to buy the parcel. Follow these steps to buy land for a group: Right click the ground on the parcel, then choose About Land. Click the Buy For Group button in the ABOUT LAND window. Confirm your purchase on the BUY LAND window, then click Purchase. Important: When you use the About Land > Buy for Group option and the objects on the land are included in the sale, any transferable objects are automatically deeded to group. Excess group land If at any time a group owns more land than they have land contributions for, Linden Lab contacts the founder of the group. Groups members must contribute more land tier credits to the group or release land within 72 hours, or the group risks losing some of their land. Restricting access to group land If a parcel of land is owned by (or set to) a group, the landowner (who may also be the group owner) or another group member with the right abilities can restrict access to allow group members only. This is useful for private events. Here's how: Choose World > Place Profile > About Land. Click the GENERAL tab. Verify that the desired group is shown next to Group. If not click Set, choose the right group, and click OK. Click the ACCESS tab. Deselect Allow Public Access. Select Allow Group Access. Region-wide maturity ratings take precedence over land parcel group access within a region. This means that you can't visit group-owned land in a region that exceeds your maximum maturity rating. If you are at least 18 years old, make sure to set your preferences to access adult content. For more information, see Age-restricted content and Age restriction parcel and estate management features. Tip: If your group is buying land on an Adult region, check beforehand that all of the intended group members will be able to access it. Group income and liabilities Group members share all income and expenses of group-owned land, IF they have the Pay group liabilities and receive group dividends ability. Like Linden dollars (L$) paid to a group, parcel directory fees are divided evenly among all group members with the ability Pay group liabilities and receive group dividends associated with their group role. If nobody in the group has this ability, the fees are paid by the group owner, who always has all abilities. If group-owned land is sold, the proceeds are distributed evenly the next day to everyone in the group who has the ability Pay group liabilities and receive group dividends associated with their group role. If nobody in the group has this ability, the L$ go to the group owner, who always has all abilities. If you own land that you've deeded to a group and subsequently abandoned, the land is returned to Governor Linden and is lost to the group. After abandoning your land, you still need to adjust the amount of land you've donated to the group in order to be billed accurately. Land tier donated to a group is always considered active, whether or not it's currently being used to hold land; in other words, land tier donated to a group always counts toward your own peak usage, and you are responsible for paying the associated fees. If you are onwer of a group and plan to disband it, withdraw all donations to avoid unexpected tier charges during the shutdown waiting period. Managing objects on group-owned land Group-owned land provides great flexibility for multiple users to collaborate on builds. However, a poorly organized group-owned parcel can make it difficult to remove other Residents' objects from your land without accidentally removing your own. There are three categories of objects on group-owned land, as listed in the OBJECTS tab of About Land window (accessed by selecting World > Place Profile > About Land). Owned by parcel owner These are objects that have been deeded to the group. Tip: Deeding to the group is an excellent choice for any object that is going to be a permanent fixture of the land, but group-deeded objects cannot pay Linden Dollars to other Residents, and group-deeded objects that accept L$ (like donation boxes) divide the L$ evenly among all eligible group members. To deed an object to the group: Right-click the object and select Edit. Under the General tab, click the Edit Wrench to choose a group. Select the Share checkbox and click Deed. Set to group These are objects owned by group members and set to the group. To set an object to the group: Right-click the object and select Edit. Under the General tab, click the Edit Wrench. Select a group. The object is set to this group. Owned by others These are objects owned by people who are not in the group, as well as objects owned by group members, that are not deeded or set to the group. This distinction is very important; anything you build that isn't set to the right group gets placed in this category. About auto return If all the objects on your group land are either deeded or set to the group, any third-party objects appear in theOwned by others category, where they can be returned through the About Land window or through auto return. You can set auto return in the OBJECTS tab of the About Land window; it's the field labeled Auto return other Residents' objects (minutes, 0 for off). Auto return returns all objects categorized as Owned by others (in order of most recent to oldest) before any objects belonging to the group, which helps your group prevent malicious users from trying to attack your build by bringing in their own objects. When you enter a number of minutes, auto return is set instantly and retroactively, so entering 15 (for example) immediately causes any objects marked as Owned by others that have been left for more than 15 minutes to return to their owners. See also Managing land. Reclaiming group land If you wish to reclaim land you have donated to a group, you must complete both of the following steps. Remember that your land contribution to the group (in square meters, not parcels) counts against your total land usage, and does not automatically decrease if you reclaim a parcel of land from the group. Failure to remove group land contributions before reclaiming a parcel for your personal use can result in an increase in land tier fees if your total land usage in group contributions and owned parcels exceeds the next land tier. Remove your existing land contribution Do this to avoid an unnecessary increase of land tier. Go to Communicate > My Groups. Select the group the land is deeded to from the MY GROUPS tab of the People window. Click the Group Profile button. Select Land/Assets. Set Your contribution to "0" sq meters. Click Save. Sell the land to yourself for L$1 Important: Be sure to specify that you want to sell the land only to yourself, or someone else may buy it. Follow these steps: Right-click the land and select About Land. Click the OBJECTS tab and set Auto return other Residents' objects to "0". Warning: Failure to turn off auto return may result in the return of all objects on the land! On the GENERAL tab, click the Sell Land button. Enter L$1 under Set a price. Under Sell the land to, choose Specific person from the dropdown menu and click Select. Enter your name in the search field of the CHOOSE RESIDENT window and click Go. Select your name and click OK. Under Sell the objects with the land? option, choose No, keep ownership of objects. Click the Set Land For Sale button. Right-click the land and select Buy Land. Click the Purchase button. If desired, deed the land to a new group.
  48. 1 point
    How to browse and search classifieds How to place a classified ad Confirming your classified ad How to view and edit your classified ad Viewing classified ad statistics How to find out what a classified ad cost The in-Viewer classifieds system allows content creators to advertise products and services to fellow Residents. You can gain additional exposure and sales by advertising effectively. How to browse and search classifieds To search and browse classified ads, either click in the Second Life Viewer toolbar or go to the Second Life Search website. Then follow these steps: In the search field, enter terms describing what you are looking for, such as jewelry or skins and click Search. A list of items matching your search terms appears. Click on any classified to learn more. Click Teleport to go to the location the classified is advertising (commonly a store), or click Map to show where it is on the World Map. To search only classified ads: In the Second Life Search window, click the dropdown next to the search input box and change it to Classifieds. In the search box, enter a query and press Enter (or the Search button). This searches only classifieds. To browse classifieds by category, such as Employment or Property rental,select the desired category from the dropdown menu at the left of the Search window. To browse the classifieds, select All Categories from the Category dropdown. Tip: To get the most targeted results, enter search terms in the Search field and refine your search by selecting a specific category from the Classifieds Category dropdown. How to place a classified ad Classified ads are sorted by price or by relevance, depending on where they are displayed in search. The highest-paid classifieds appear on top when searching in Everything, and the most relevant classifieds appear at the top when searching in the Classifieds section. To create a classified: Position your avatar in the location where you want the link in the ad to teleport people to. For example, at the entrance of your store. Choose Me > Picks... In the bottom left, click the + icon and choose New Classified. The Edit Classified window opens. Fill out the fields as described below. You can edit everything about your classified, except the price, at any time. When you've filled out the fields as desired, click Publish. The Publishing Classified window opens. Enter the price you want to pay in Linden Dollars (L$). Higher prices are ranked higher in search (but the price paid for each classified isn't publicly shown). If you checked Auto renew each week, this is also the price you're charged each week for your classified, so make sure you have enough in your total L$ balance. Click Publish to publish your classified ad. The sidebar refreshes with a notification of what you paid, and shows your new classified under the Classifieds section of your profile. Important: To change the price of a classified ad, you must create a new classified and copy information from the original ad into the new one. Then, let the old classified expire by itself, or if you're sure, delete it manually. If you delete a classified early, you won't receive a refund for any remaining time left on your classified listing. If you want to stop paying for a recurring classified, make sure the Auto renew each week checkbox is unchecked. Classified ad fields: Picture - By default this will have a picture of the parcel where your avatar is standing (from World > About Land). To change it, click the picture, choose a texture (image) from your inventory, and click OK. You can upload a new picture from your hard drive by using Build menu > Upload > Image (L$10). Title: By default, the parcel's name. If you are advertising a specific product rather than a location, you can change the title text appropriately. Description: By default, the parcel's description. You can change the text in the field if you wish. The maximum length is 256 characters. Unless you're paying very highly in a broad category like "hair" or "shoes", it is generally more useful to use keywords specific your product niche. Use relevant keywords, but don't spamdex or your listing may be removed. Keywords are "stemmed", meaning that you don't have to enter every variation. For example, a search for "dance" also searches for "dances", "danced", and "dancing". Entering a hyperlink automatically makes it clickable. Location: This shows the exact coordinates at which your avatar is positioned. You can always change this by moving your avatar somewhere else and clicking Set to Current Location. Category Select a specific category. By default, the Classifieds tab in Search window shows all categories, but you can use a dropdown to narrow it down to one of the selections shown here. Content type: Classified ad content is filtered by maturity, which includes keywords consistent with search in general. Choose an appropriate maturity rating, or your classified might be removed without warning. By default, the maturity rating will be Moderate or General, depending on the rating of the region in which you create the classified. Note: If you're in an Adult region, the classified shows Moderate. This is a known issue Auto renew each week - Check this box if you want this classified to run automatically and continuously without your intervention. Each week you'll be charged the price you choose for your classified after you Publish it. Confirming your classified ad Follow the instructions in How to browse and search classifieds to find your classified the same way potential customers will: by searching for keywords. If you can't find it at first, try using keywords that are more unique to your listing. Tip: Allow at least an hour for a classified to appear and update in search. How to view and edit your classified ad After placing a classified ad, you can edit everything except the Price for listing. Follow these steps: Select Me > Picks... Click a classified, then click Info at the bottom. Notice that Clicks stats are also shown. If you want to edit, click Edit at the bottom. You can edit all of the details you entered when you first placed the classified. When you're done editing, click Save at the bottom. Viewing classified ad statistics Use classified ad statistics ("stats") to see how much attention an ad is getting. To see your stats, view one of your own classifieds as described above. You'll see Clicks: with stats next to it: Teleport - Number of times people have clicked the Teleport button when viewing your classified shown in both the Search window and the extended Classified Info. Map - Number of times people have clicked the Map button when viewing your classified, shown in the extended Classified Info. Profile - Number of times people have clicked the Profile button in Find to show your classified ad. Only you, as the classified creator, can see these. How to find out how much a classified ad cost As an advertiser, you may want to find out how much competitors are paying for their classified ads. To do so: Search for classifieds as described above Click a classified ad to expand it, Click the More Info button to view the full add. The Price for listing field shows the price paid for the advertisement.
  49. 1 point
    table { border-collapse: collapse; width: 100%; } th, td { text-align: left; padding: 8px; } tr:nth-child(even) {background-color: #f2f2f2;} Update: As of June 6, 2016, Turkish Second Life Residents are unable to use PayPal to process credit on their US dollar balances. It is, however, still possible for Turkish Residents to make purchases or to process credit using Skrill. For more information about PayPal's suspension of operations in Turkey, please visit PayPal's website (in Turkish). This article lists payment options available to Residents from the 50 most active countries in Second Life. If your country is not listed here, you can always use a credit card or check PayPal's website and Skrill's website for information about the countries they service. See our article about Billing for additional information about payments and billing for Second Life. Country PayPal Skrill Credit Card Argentina Yes paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Australia Yes POLi paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Austria Yes EPS/Netpay Payolution Skrill Direct SOFORT paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Belgium Yes SOFORT paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Brazil Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Canada Yes paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Chile Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron China Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Colombia Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Croatia Yes paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Czech Republic Yes paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Denmark Yes Trustly paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Ecuador Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Egypt Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Finland Yes Paytrail Trustly paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron France Yes Skrill Direct SOFORT paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Germany Yes ELV Giropay Payolution Skrill Direct SOFORT Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Greece Yes paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Hungary Yes Skrill Direct paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron India Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Indonesia Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Ireland Yes paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Israel Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Italy Yes Skrill Direct SOFORT Trustly paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Japan Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Korea South Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Malaysia Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Mexico Yes paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Netherlands Yes iDEAL SOFORT paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron New Zealand Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Norway Yes paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Peru Yes paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Philippines Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Poland Yes Przelewy24 SOFORT Trustly paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Portugal Yes paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Puerto Rico Yes paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard JCB Diners Club Discover Romania Yes paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Russia Yes Yandex Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Saudi Arabia Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Singapore Yes eNETS Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron South Africa Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Spain Yes Skrill Direct SOFORT Trustly paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Sweden Yes Trustly paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Switzerland Yes Payolution SOFORT paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Turkey Yes paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Ukraine Yes Yandex Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron United Kingdom Yes Skrill Direct SOFORT paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron United States Yes paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard JCB Diners Club Discover Uruguay Yes paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Venezuela Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron
  50. 1 point
      Cuándo denunciar una infracción Cómo denunciar una infracción Qué ocurre cuando se denuncia una infracción Retractarse de una denuncia de infracción Cómo denunciar a un residente menor de edad Infracciones en el chat de voz   En otros idiomas: Deutsch English Français Português Italiano 日本語 Türkçe Русский Cuándo denunciar una infracción Una infracción se produce cuando alguien infringe las Condiciones del Servicio o las Normas de la Comunidad. Todos los residentes aceptan respetar estas reglas cuando se suscriben a Second Life. Algunos lugares especiales, como los Puntos de información, tienen restricciones adicionales llamadas Normas de las áreas de bienvenida. Si un usuario incumple en tu presencia alguna de estas normas de una manera que puede considerarse deliberada o malintencionada, todos los usuarios que lo hayan presenciado deben presentar una denuncia de infracción. Si se han producido varios incidentes, denuncia varias infracciones. Denuncia cualquier infracción que presencies, no solo las que te afecten personalmente. No todos los residentes conocen el sistema de Filing an abuse reportdenuncia de infracciones ni se acuerdan de utilizarlo, de manera que, por favor ayuda a tus compañeros residentes. Las denuncias de varias personas acentúan la gravedad de un suceso. Más sugerencias: Si un script te empuja o te tira, pulsa el botón derecho en un objeto y selecciona Sentarme aquí. Así evitarás que te desplace. En los terrenos donde están habilitados los combates o los daños, disparar a alguien no es una infracción. En la barra de menús encontrarás un corazón rojo que indica tu salud. Si puedes verlo, es porque en esa zona están permitidos los combates y las armas de fuego. Tu avatar no puede morir de manera permanente: aunque pierdas toda la salud, lo único que ocurrirá es que te teleportarás a tu Base. El uso de armas en terrenos donde el combate no está permitido generalmente supone una infracción, salvo que el propietario del terreno lo haya permitido expresamente, por ejemplo, para un juego de rol. Si una amistad ha terminado, puedes ignorar a la persona y borrarla de tu lista de amigos. Así también le quitarás cualquier permiso que le hayas concedido, como la posibilidad de rastrearte en el mapa. Cómo denunciar una infracción Para denunciar una infracción, puedes hacer cualquiera de los siguientes: Elige Ayuda > Denunciar una infracción en los menús de la parte superior de la ventana del visor. Para denunciar directamente a otro residente, pulsa con el botón derecho en su avatar y elige Denunciar  Para denunciar directamente a un objeto, pulsa con el botón derecho en el objeto y elige Gestionar > Denunciar la infracción. Se abre la ventana DENUNCIA DE INFRACCIÓN, que muestra una captura de la pantalla actual, así como la información de identificación pertinente si has seleccionado un avatar o un objeto. Si la captura de pantalla ayuda a aclarar el problema, selecciona la casilla Usar esta captura de pantalla. Las capturas de pantalla pueden proporcionar una prueba visual muy útil; inclúyelas siempre que sea oportuno. Si denuncias a un avatar o un objeto, pulsa el botón y se rellenará automáticamente la información pertinente. Pulsa Elegir la categoría y selecciona una categoría. Si no encuentras una categoría adecuada para el suceso concreto que deseas denunciar, selecciona Elegir la categoría > Otra y escribe una explicación en el campo Detalle. El campo Localización de la infracción se rellena automáticamente con tu ubicación actual. Cámbialo si deseas especificar otro lugar. En el campo Resumen, escribe un resumen conciso en una línea, como si fuera el asunto de un correo electrónico. Escribe un comentario breve, pero claro. Usa el campo Detalles para proporcionarnos tanta información pertinente como sea posible, con objeto de ayudarnos a aclarar el suceso. Pulsa en Denunciar la infracción para presentar la denuncia. Sugerencia: Si no conoces el nombre del infractor, elige "Governor Linden" como marcador de posición y explica los detalles de la denuncia. Qué ocurre cuando se denuncia una infracción Recibirás una respuesta automática por correo electrónico. Si necesitas añadir más información después de denunciar la infracción, presenta una denuncia nueva. Intentamos resolver las denuncias con la mayor brevedad posible, pero el tiempo de respuesta depende sobre todo de la cantidad de denuncias que se hayan acumulado. Por razones de privacidad, no podemos comunicarte los detalles de la investigación de una denuncia por infracción. En cuanto presentes la denuncia, nosotros nos ocuparemos del caso. Muchas veces, lo único que hace falta para cortar un problema es una advertencia oficial. Normalmente, cuando un residente vulnera nuestras Condiciones de servicio y/o Normas de la comunidad, le damos varias oportunidades para cambiar de conducta antes de penalizarle. En todos los casos, se consulta el expediente disciplinario del residente para que las medidas que tomamos sean proporcionadas. Una infracción grave puede causar la suspensión de la cuenta o una expulsión permanente. La duración de la suspensión depende del carácter de la infracción, las infracciones anteriores y a cuántas personas afecta. Sugerencia: Si la infracción del residente es reiterada, denuncia cada incidente. El procedimiento disciplinario solo puede ponerse en marcha cuando se nos informa de una conducta infractora permanente. Retractarse de una denuncia de infracción Si denuncias una infracción y, posteriormente, te das cuenta de que has cometido un error, puedes presentar una nueva denuncia explicando que no deseas que se investigue la anterior. Facilítanos toda la información que consideres útil. Cómo denunciar a un residente menor de edad Las Condiciones del servicio de Second Life disponen que todos los residentes deben tener por lo menos 16 años de edad, a excepción de los residentes de 13 a 15 años, que solo pueden visitar el estado de una institución patrocinadora. Si deseas más información, consulta Adolescentes en Second Life. Si encuentras a un menor de 16 años fuera del estado de una institución patrocinadora, debes hacer lo siguiente: Asegúrate de que la persona haya admitido que es menor de edad con sus propias palabras en un chat del mundo virtual (por ejemplo, diciendo "tengo 14 años"). No podemos aceptar habladurías, rumores ni confesiones realizadas en programas de mensajería instantánea externos ni en lugares fuera de Second Life. En nuestro mundo virtual, usa Ayuda > Denunciar la infracción para abrir la herramienta de denuncia de infracciones. Pulsa en Elegir la categoría y selecciona la categoría Edad. Escribe la información que consideres necesaria, de la forma más concreta posible. Si has escuchado recientemente que el usuario es menor de edad en un chat, copia y pega el fragmento en el campo Detalle. Si el suceso ocurrió hace tiempo, y no tienes una grabación del chat, repite todo lo que puedas de la conversación, para que nosotros sepamos qué debemos buscar. Pulsa el botón Denunciar la infracción y nuestro equipo de infracciones investigará el hecho y tomará las medidas oportunas. Muchas gracias por tu colaboración. Cuando una denuncia es válida, Linden Lab pone la cuenta afectada en estado de retención administrativa y solicita una verificación de la edad del titular por correo electrónico. Para restaurar la cuenta, debes proporcionar una copia legible de cualquier documento identificativo oficial (carné de identidad, permiso de conducir, pasaporte, cartilla militar, certificado de nacimiento) en el que se especifiquen claramente tanto el nombre como la fecha de nacimiento del titular. Esta es la única forma de identificación admitida para confirmar la edad. Puedes enviar tu documentación de identidad por correo electrónico, por fax o por correo postal. El proceso de verificación de la edad normalmente se resuelve en el plazo de una semana. Hacemos todo lo que podemos para mantener activas las cuentas de Second Life. Infracciones en el chat de voz Si una persona te acosa en una conversación de voz, la mejor solución es ignorarla. Puedes denunciar una infracción, aunque en estos casos es difícil proporcionar pruebas concretas, ya que no hay una grabación de MI o de chat. Por motivos de sentido común, no podemos aceptar grabaciones de chat de voz realizadas con otros programas o colocando una grabadora junto a los altavoces. Puedes silenciar el chat de voz de dos maneras en el mundo virtual: Pulsa con el botón derecho en el avatar y elige Ignorar. Pulsa el botón Gente, en la parte inferior del Visor, y se abrirá la ventana GENTE. Abre la pestaña CERCANA, selecciona el avatar y elige Ignorar/No ignorar. Aparecerá un icono rojo pequeño junto a su nombre. Nota: Si escribes mensajes de MI, pagas dólares Linden u ofreces artículos del inventario a una persona que has ignorado, se desbloqueará automáticamente. Puedes consultar más información en Ignorar.
×
×
  • Create New...